Documentation

HiPath 4000 V5
Initial Installation/Startup
Installation Instructions

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631

Communication for the open minded

Siemens Enterprise Communications

[Link]/open
 Copyright © Siemens Enterprise
Communications GmbH & Co. KG 2009
Hofmannstr. 51, 80200 München
Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH & Co. KG
is a Trademark Licensee of Siemens AG
Reference No.: A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631
The information provided in this document contains
merely general descriptions or characteristics of
performance which in case of actual use do not
always apply as described or which may change as
a result of further development of the products. An
obligation to provide the respective characteristics
shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of
contract. Availability and technical specifications are
subject to change without notice.
Communication for the open minded OpenScape, OpenStage and HiPath are registered
trademarks of Siemens Enterprise
Communications GmbH & Co. KG.
Siemens Enterprise Communications All other company, brand, product and service
[Link]/open names are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective holders.
 [Link]
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Contents

Contents 0

1 Introduction and Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.1 Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2 Target Group and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3 Using this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.1 Manual Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.2 Reference Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.3 Notational Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.4 Safety Information and Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.4.1 Warning Sign: Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.4.2 Warning Sign: Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.4.3 Warning Sign: Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.4.4 Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.5 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.6 Reporting Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.7 Normal Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.8 Proper Disposal and Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.9 Standards and Guidelines on Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.9.1 Connection to the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.9.2 Fire Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.9.3 Screened Lines for LAN, WAN, and DMZ Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.9.4 Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.10 Data Protection and Data Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.11 Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.1 System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.1.1 AC-Powered, Nonredundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
[Link] CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
[Link] Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
[Link] Mono . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
[Link] LTUW Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.1.2 AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.1.3 DC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1.4 AP 3700 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.1.5 Survivability Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.2 Switching Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.2.1 Common Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.2.2 Switching Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.2.3 Service Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3 Telephony Shelves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.4 External Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.4.1 Administrative Data Processor (ADP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
[Link] System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
[Link] Direct AMO Dialog (DAD) Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
[Link] Remote Maintenance and Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
[Link] Local Maintenance Terminal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 3
[Link]
Contents Nur für den internen Gebrauch

[Link] Call Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

[Link] Traffic Metering and Statistics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[Link] System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[Link] RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[Link] HSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.5 Internal Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.5.1 Internal Server Common Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3 Preparing for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.1 Installation Procedures Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.2 Installation Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.3 Conducting the Site Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4 Receiving the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.5 Inspecting for Shipping Damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.6 Removing the System from its Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.7 Unloading a System with a Roller Base from the Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.8 Positioning the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.9 Leveling the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.9.1 Leveling a Roller Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.9.2 Leveling an AP 3700-9 (Standalone). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.10 Removing the Front Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.10.1 AP 3300 Front Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.10.2 AP 3700 Front Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.10.3 AP 3300 Back Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.11 Important Labels on the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.12 Inventorying the System Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.13 Inventorying the System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.14 Inventorying the Installation Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.15 Pre-Installation Trunk Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.16 Installing Seismic Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.17 Stacking HiPath 4000 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.18 Installing the Cable Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4 Special Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.1 Removing 24-Port Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.1.1 SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.1.2 Installing the Adapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.2 Installing 24DA Splitting Strips on an Old Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.3 Installing AP 3700 Cabinets in 19-Inch Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.4 Shielding Connection on the Opening of the LTU Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5 Installation Variants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.1 Standard Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.1.1 Single-Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.2 Multiple Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.3 AC-to-DC Power Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.4 DC-to-DC Power Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.5 Free-Standing Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.5.1 CSPCI Box in UCS Shelf, Stack 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.5.2 CSPCI Box in External 19" Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5.5.3 HiPath 4000 Free-Standing Installation (Maximum Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.6 Cabling Diagram, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.7 Shelf Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
4 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 [Link]
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Contents

5.7.1 CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

[Link] Duplex Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
[Link] Simplex Mono Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.7.2 UPR Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.7.3 Unit Peripheral Nonredundant Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.7.4 AP 3700-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.7.5 AP 3700-13 (Expansion Cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.7.6 Redundant Power Box Stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.8 Installation with AP 3700 Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.8.1 Connecting AP 3700-9 to L80XF/LTUW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.8.2 Connecting AP 3700-13 to CSPCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.8.3 AP 3700 Configuration Rules and Examples with 19" Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
[Link] Suitable Cabinet Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
[Link] Sample Configuration AP 3700 or AP3700 IP in a Cabinet with 25 Rack Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
[Link] Sample Configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a Cabinet with 37 Rack Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
[Link] Sample Configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a Cabinet with 42 Rack Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
[Link] Sample Configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a Cabinet with 47 Rack Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.9 MDFHX 6 Mounting Location, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.10 MDFHX 8 Mounting Location, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6 Grounding the HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.1 Grounding the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.2 Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6.2.1 Grounding the Base Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6.2.2 Installing the Ground Straps Between Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.3 Grounding the System, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.4 Grounding the System, U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
6.5 Grounding AP 3700 System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.6 System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
7 Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7.1 Connecting to the Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7.1.1 Connecting to the Mains with LUNA/LPC80 Power Supply Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
7.1.2 Connecting to the Mains Using the Power Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7.2 Installing a Three-Phase Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.3 Installing a Single-Phase Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7.4 Overview of Mains Connection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
7.5 Installing a Three-Phase or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-Point Grounding, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7.6 Overview of Mains Connection 2, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.7 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
7.8 AC Connection to Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
7.8.1 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Nonredundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
7.8.2 Attaching the Power Cable to the CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.9 Setting the Operating Mode for the LPC80, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
7.9.1 Setting the Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
7.10 DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.10.1 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.10.2 Routing the Power Cables from the UACD and UDCD to the HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7.10.3 Attaching a DC Cable to the CSPCI Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7.11 DC Connection with UP/L80XF Cabinet, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.12 AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.13 DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.13.1 Connecting the Battery to the Power Box, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 5
[Link]
Contents Nur für den internen Gebrauch

7.13.2 Connecting the MDF for a Nonredundant, System, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

7.14 AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.14.1 AC Connection AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.14.2 DC Connection AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.14.3 AC Connection AP 3700 in 19" Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.14.4 DC Connection AP 3700 with DCDR (Fuse Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7.14.5 DC Connection AP 3700 with DCDR (DC Kit for 19-Inch Cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.14.6 DCDR Connection from Behind. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.14.7 DC Connection of AP 3700 to the MDF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.15 UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) 19-Inch Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.15.1 UACD Power Box Part Numbers (PSR930/PSR930E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.15.2 AC/DC Connection with UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) in 19” Cabinet with AP3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.15.3 AC/DC Connection with UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) in 19” Cabinet with UPR/LTUW . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.15.4 Mains Connection Variants for UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
[Link] Installing a Three-Phase Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
[Link] Installing a Single-Phase Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
[Link] Installing a Two-Phase Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
[Link] Installing a Mains Delta Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
7.15.5 Connecting a Battery to the UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
7.16 UACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.16.1 UACD Equipment Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.16.2 UACD 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.16.3 UACD 2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
7.17 Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7.17.1 Part Numbers for Battery Manager Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7.17.2 Battery Manager, Connection Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
7.18 UDCD, North America Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7.18.1 UDCD Equipment Part Numbers, North America Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7.18.2 Overview of UDCD stack 1 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7.19 Connecting the Power Box to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.19.1 Connecting the MDF for a Redundant System, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.20 PSDXE Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
7.21 Calculating the Battery Cabling, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8 Internal Line Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.1 Installing Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.1.1 Overview of CSPCI (RTM Board) Connection to L80XF/LTUW/AP 3700 (LTUCA Board) . . . . . . . . 169
8.1.2 Overview of CSPCI Periphery Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.2 Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
9 External Cabling Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9.1 MDFHX6 Assembly, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
9.1.1 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
9.1.2 Cable Routing from AP 3700-13 Cabinet to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
9.2 MDFHX8 Assembly, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
9.2.1 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
9.2.2 Cable Routing from AP 3700-13 Cabinet to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
9.3 Overvoltage Protection of the Modules, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
9.4 MDF Cable Connections, I.M.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
9.5 Connecting the Signal or Alarm Cables to the MDF, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9.6 Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9.6.1 Subscriber-Line Module Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
[Link] Connecting the Subscriber Line Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
6 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 [Link]
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Contents

9.6.2 Trunk Module Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

[Link] Connecting the Trunk Modules to the MDF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
[Link] Connection to MDF with DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
[Link] Connecting to the MDF with CDR and DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
[Link] Connecting to the MDF with CDR but without DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
9.7 Creating a Strapping List, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
9.7.1 System Assignment 16/24 DA Splitting Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
9.7.2 Network Assignment 25/35 DA Strapping Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
10 Installing Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
10.1 Installing the AC-WIN IP Attendant Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
10.2 Connecting the Service Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
10.3 Hicom Teleservice HTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10.4 Connecting Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10.4.1 Connecting ISDN Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
[Link] PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem and DIUT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
[Link] PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with DIUT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
[Link] PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem in DIUS2 Emulation with DIUT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
[Link] CDG/PBXXX as Gateway, Fully Integrated Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
[Link] CDG/PBXXX with DIUT2 as Gateway, Partially Integrated Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
10.5 Installing the Breakout Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
10.6 Installing the Distance Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
11 Installing the IPDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
11.1 IPDA Connection Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
11.1.1 Connecting to AP 3700-9 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
11.1.2 Connecting to LTUW/L80XF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
12 Starting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12.1 Completing the Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12.2 Pre-Power On Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12.2.1 Reseating the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
12.2.2 Checking the Signal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
12.2.3 Checking the Power Distribution Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
12.3 Turning on a Nonredundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
12.4 Turning on Cabinet 1 and 2 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
12.5 Turning on Cabinet 3 and 4 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
12.6 Turning on Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
12.7 Turning on Cabinet 2 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
12.8 Turning on Cabinet 3 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
12.9 Turning on Cabinet 4 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
12.10 Activating the Clock Battery on the DSCXL Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
12.11 Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
12.12 Installing the Customer Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
12.12.1 Factory-Generated Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
12.12.2 Site-Generated Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
12.13 Starting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
12.14 Connecting to the TAP, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
12.15 Replacing the Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
13 Verifying the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
13.1 Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
13.2 Checking the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
13.3 Checking the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 7
[Link]
Contents Nur für den internen Gebrauch

13.4 Checking and Testing the Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

13.5 Testing the Restart and Failure Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
13.6 Backing up the Customer Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
13.7 Setting and Activating the HTS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
13.8 Checking the Ring Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
13.9 Verifying the Station-to-MDF Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
13.10 Verifying Transmission Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
13.10.1 Balancing Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
13.10.2 Choosing the Balance Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
13.10.3 Selecting the Balance Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
[Link] Balancing CO Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
[Link] Balancing DID Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
[Link] Balancing OPS Lines and Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
13.10.4 Verifying ISDN Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
13.10.5 Verifying T1 Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
13.10.6 Recording Circuit IDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
13.11 Verifying the MO-Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
13.12 Verifying the Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
13.13 Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
13.13.1 Testing CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
13.13.2 Testing Least-Cost Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
13.14 Verifying the System Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
13.15 Customer Training, I.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
14 Adding Cabinets to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
14.1 Expansion Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
14.2 Connecting the Cabinet Stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
8 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Product Overview

1 Introduction and Important Notes

Notes for the Editor:

• Modify Sections 1.1 to 1.3 to reflect the product or manual.

• Section 1.4 ("Safety Information and Warnings") contains standard texts

relating to safety. They apply equally to all manuals.

• Additional information on observing standards and guidelines that cannot be

included in the section on general safety information and warnings can be
entered in section 1.8. For example, this can include additional product-,
application- or country-specific information.

• After you have completed the section, delete all text marked in red.

1.1 Product Overview

The Product and Its Applications

1.2 Target Group and Requirements

Audience and Required Courses

1.3 Using this Manual

1.3.1 Manual Structure

Here you will find the names of the different sections and a brief description of
their contents.

This section may be omitted, depending on the manual length and requirements.

1.3.2 Reference Manuals

This section contains the titles and part numbers of the other manuals relating to
the product.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 9
1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Using this Manual

1.3.3 Notational Conventions Used

This manual uses the following notational conventions:
We do not yet have a fully established standard set of notational conventions. As
a result, please write down the meaning of the fonts as they appear in your
manual. For example:

Purpose Style Example

Special emphasis Boldface Name must not be deleted.
User interface Boldface Click OK.
elements
Menu sequence > File > Close
Textual cross- Italics For more information, see Network.
references
Output Font with a Command not found.
fixed width
such as
Courier
Input Font with a Enter LOCAL as the file name.
fixed width
such as
Courier
Key combinations Font with a <CTRL>+<ALT>+<ESC>
fixed width
such as
Courier
Steps and Numbered lists 1. Set up the DSL telephony subscriber with the
subordinate steps in (using corresponding extension number.
instructions numbers and a) Click Add.
letters) b) In DSL Telephony Subscriber, enter the
name of the DSL telephony subscriber.
Options in Bulleted list • If you want to output amounts, select the
instructions Output Amounts, Not Units checkbox.
• If you want to output units, deselect the
Output Amounts, Not Units checkbox.

IMPORTANT: Identifies useful information.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
10 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information and Warnings

1.4 Safety Information and Warnings

Work on communication systems and devices may only be carried out by
qualified persons.

For the purposes of safety information and warnings, qualified persons are
persons who are authorized to place into operation, ground, and label systems,
devices, and lines in accordance with applicable safety procedures and
standards.

It is absolutely essential that you read and understand the following safety infor-
mation and warnings before starting installation and implementation work on the
communication system or device.

You should also carefully read and observe all safety information and warnings
on the communication systems and devices themselves.

Familiarize yourself with emergency numbers.

Always consult your manager before starting work in conditions where the
necessary safety precautions do not appear to be in place.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 11
1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information and Warnings

Types of safety information and warnings

The following grades of safety information/warnings are used in this manual:

7 DANGER
Indicates an immediate danger that could result in death or serious injury.

7 WARNING
Indicates a general danger that could result in death or serious injury.

7 CAUTION
Indicates a danger that could result in injury.

NOTE: Indicates situations that could result in damage to property and/or loss of
data.

Symbols for specifying the source of danger more exactly

The following symbols are not usually used in the manual. They explain symbols
that may be depicted on the communication systems and equipment.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
12 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information and Warnings

1.4.1 Warning Sign: Danger

7 DANGER
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires

• Note: Voltages above 30 Vac (alternating current) or 60 Vdc (direct current)

are dangerous.

• Only personnel with proper qualifications or qualified electricians should

perform work on the low-voltage network (<1000 Vac) and all work must
satisfy national/local requirements for electric connectors.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 13
1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information and Warnings

1.4.2 Warning Sign: Warning

7 WARNING
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires

An electric shock can be life-threatening or lead to serious injuries such as burns.

There are additional dangers even when working with low voltage and large cable
cross-sections. Cables with a large cross-section generally have lower voltages,
although the amperages are higher.

• Before starting any work, check that the circuits involved are de-energized.
Never take it for granted that turning off a main switch or circuit breaker will
reliably interrupt all circuits.

• Only use systems, tools, and equipment which are in perfect condition. Do not
use equipment with visible damage.

• Replace any damaged safety equipment (covers, labels and ground wires)
immediately.

• Replace the power cable immediately if you notice any damage.

• Only place systems or devices in protection class I into operation using a

ground contact socket.

• Connect the communication system and, if necessary, the main distribution

frame to the ground wire before starting up the system and connecting
telephones and lines. Never operate the communication system without the
required ground wire.

• Never touch live wires without ensuring adequate insulation.

• Do not carry out any hardware installation work on communication systems

and devices during a storm.

• Expect leakage current from the communications network. Disconnect all

communication lines from the system before disconnecting the prescribed
ground wire from the system.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
14 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information and Warnings

7 WARNING
Disconnection from power circuit(s)

A disconnect device can be a disconnecting switch (main switch), circuit breaker

(fuse/cutout), or power plug that completely disconnects the communication
system and device from the power circuit.

• Before carrying out any work on the communication system or on the device,
find out whether there is a disconnect device and locate it.

• When you need to disconnect the power supply to the communication system
or device, you do so using the disconnect device.

• Secure the disconnect device mechanically so that it cannot be used by other

persons and attach a sign reading DO NOT OPERATE to the disconnect
device.

• Disconnect all power supply circuits if the communication system’s power

supply unit is not needed for certain work (for example, when changing
cables).
Disconnect the communication system’s power plug and ensure that the
communication system or device is not powered from an additional power
source (for example, an uninterruptible power supply), or that it is protected
by an additional fuse or an additional main switch.

• If you are performing work on circuits with hazardous voltages, always work
together with a partner who is familiar with the location of the disconnect
devices for the power supplies.

• Always disconnect the power supply when you are working directly next to a
power supply unit or direct current converter, unless the work instructions
expressly permit you to work without disconnecting the power supply.

• As long as the power supply is switched on, always observe the greatest
caution when performing measurements on powered components and
maintenance work on plug-in cards, PC boards and covers.

• Metallic surfaces such as mirrors are conductive. If you touch them, there is
a risk of electric shocks or short circuits.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 15
1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information and Warnings

1.4.3 Warning Sign: Caution

7 CAUTION
Danger of injury:

• When working on an open communication system or device, make sure that

it is never left unattended.

• Risk of injury resulting from heavy items or loads.

Lifting heavy objects/loads can cause injury. Use appropriate aids to carry out
such tasks.

• Risk of injury resulting from laser radiation.

If there are any optical interfaces: In case of laser radiation,
do not look directly into the beam. You could damage your eyes.

7 CAUTION
Risk of explosion if accumulators and batteries are not changed properly:

• Only use licensed battery packs and batteries.

• The lithium battery must be replaced only by an identical battery or one

recommended by the manufacturer.

7 CAUTION
Risk of fire:

• Only communications cables with a cable diameter of at least 0.4 mm (AWG

26) or larger may be used.

• The system cabinets must not be fitted with any third-party devices that have
not been approved.

• Do not store any documents or similar flammable items in the system.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
16 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information and Warnings

7 CAUTION
General risk of injury/accidents in the workplace:

• When maintenance work has been completed, always re-install all safety
equipment in the right place. Also close all doors, covers, or the housing after
completing test and maintenance work.

• Lay cables so as to prevent any risk of them being damaged or causing

accidents, such as tripping.

• Make sure that the work area is well lit and tidy.

• When working on the communication system, never wear loose clothing and
always tie back long hair.

• Do not wear jewelry, metal watchbands or clothes with metal ornaments or

rivets. There is a risk of injury and short circuits.

• Always wear the necessary eye protection whenever appropriate.

• Always wear a hard hat where there is a risk of injury from falling objects.

• Check your tools regularly. Only use intact tools.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 17
1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information and Warnings

1.4.4 Important Information

Note the following information in order to avoid damage to property:

• Before placing the system into operation, check whether the nominal voltage
of the power supply network corresponds to the nominal voltage of the
communication system or device (type plate). If necessary, adjust the nominal
voltage of the communication system or device appropriately.

• Protection of electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD):

– Always wear the wristband in the prescribed manner before performing

any work on PC boards and modules.

– Transport PC boards and modules only in suitable protective packaging.

– Always place PC boards and modules on a grounded conductive base,

and do not work on the PC boards anywhere else.

– Only use grounded soldering irons.

• Use only original accessories. Failure to comply with this safety information
may damage the communication system or violate safety and EMC regula-
tions.

• Before starting wall assembly, check that the load-bearing capacity of the wall
is adequate, Always use suitable installation and fixing material to make sure
that the communication system is mounted safely.

• Condensation damage:
If the temperature changes rapidly, air humidity can precipitate. If the commu-
nication system or device is moved from a colder to a warmer environment,
moisture can precipitate. Wait until the temperature has adjusted to the
ambient temperature and the communication system or device is completely
dry before starting it up.

• If there is no emergency power supply available or if switchover to analog

emergency phones is not possible during a power failure, no more
emergency calls can be made via the communication system if the power
supply unit fails.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
18 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Emergencies

1.5 Emergencies
What to do in an emergency
• In the event of an accident, remain calm and controlled.

• Always switch off the power supply before you touch an accident victim.

• If you are not able to immediately switch off the power supply, only touch the
victim with non-conductive materials (such as a wooden broom handle), and
first of all try to isolate the victim from the power supply.

First aid
• Be familiar with basic first aid procedures for electrical shock. A fundamental
knowledge of the various resuscitation methods if the victim has stopped
breathing or if the victim’s heart is no longer beating, as well as first aid for
treating burns, is absolutely necessary in such emergencies.

• If the victim is not breathing, immediately perform mouth-to-mouth or mouth-

to-nose resuscitation.

• If you have appropriate training, immediately perform heart massage if the

victim’s heart is not beating.

Calling for help

• Immediately call an ambulance or an emergency physician. Provide the
following information in the following sequence:

– Where did the accident happen?

– What happened?

– How many people were injured?

– What type of injuries?

– Wait for questions.

1.6 Reporting Accidents

• Immediately report all accidents, near accidents and potential sources of
danger to your manager.

• Report all electric shocks, no matter how small.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 19
1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Normal Use

1.7 Normal Use

The communication system may only be used for the applications described in
this documentation and only in conjunction with add-on devices and components
recommended and approved by
Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH & Co. KG.
The prerequisites for the normal use of the communication system include appro-
priate transport, storage, installation and startup as well as meticulous operation
and maintenance.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
20 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Proper Disposal and Recycling

1.8 Proper Disposal and Recycling

All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of

separately from the municipal waste stream via designated collection
facilities appointed by the government or the local authorities.

The correct disposal and separate collection of your old appliance will
help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment
and human health. It is a precondition for reuse and recycling of used
electrical and electronic equipment.

For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance,

please contact your city office, waste disposal service, the shop
where you purchased the product or your sales representative.

The statements quoted above are only fully valid for equipment which
is installed and sold in the countries of the European Union and is
covered by the directive 2002/96/EC. Countries outside the
European Union may have other regulations regarding the disposal
of electrical and electronic equipment.

Used accumulators and batteries with this sign are valuable

economic goods and must be recycled. Used accumulators and
batteries that are not recycled must be disposed of as hazardous
waste with full observance of all regulations.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 21
1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Standards and Guidelines on Installation

1.9 Standards and Guidelines on Installation

1.9.1 Connection to the Power Supply

HiPath communication systems are approved for connection to TN-S power
supply systems. They can also be connected to a TN-C-S power supply system
in which the PEN conductor is divided into a ground wire and a neutral wire. TN-
S and TN-C-S systems are defined in the IEC 364-3 standard.

If work on the low-voltage network is required, it must be carried out by a qualified

electrician. The installation work required to connect HiPath communication
systems must be carried out with full observance of IEC 60364 and IEC 60364-
4-41 or the equivalent legal norms and national regulations (in the U.S. and
Canada, for example).

1.9.2 Fire Safety Regulations

Fire safety regulations are specified in country-specific building codes. Adhere to
the relevant regulations.

To conform with the legal fire protection and EMC requirements, operate the
HiPath systems only when closed. You may open the system only briefly for
assembly and maintenance work.

As regards their burning behavior, HiPath system cables conform to the interna-
tional standard IEC 60332-1. The following standards include equivalent require-
ments regarding the burning behavior of cables.

IEC 60332-1 EN 50265-1 with VDE 0482 parts 265-1 with

EN 50265-2-1 VDE 0842 parts 265-2-1

-------------------- ----------------------- --------------------------

Note: Note: Note:
IEC 60332-1 corre- EN 50265-1 and -2-1 VDE 0482 parts 265-1 and -2-1
sponds to UL VW-1 replace HD 405.1 replace
VDE 0472, part 804, test type B

The responsible project management and service departments must verify

whether this standard satisfies the applicable building regulations and any other
additional regulations.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
22 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Standards and Guidelines on Installation

1.9.3 Screened Lines for LAN, WAN, and DMZ

Connections
The following prerequisites must be met in order to comply with CE requirements
relating to the electromagnetic compatibility of the communication system and its
LAN, WAN, and DMZ connections:
• The communication system may only be operated with screened connection
cables. This means that a screened CAT.5 cable with a length of at least 3m
must be used between the screened LAN, WAN, and DMZ connection
sockets of the communication system and the connection to the building
utilities or the connection to active external components. The cable screen on
the cable end that connects to the building utilities or active external compo-
nents must be grounded (building potential equalization connection).
• In the case of shorter connections with an active external component (LAN
switch or similar), a screened CAT.5 cable must also be used. However, the
active component must have a corresponding screened LAN connection with
a grounded screened connector (building potential equalization connection).
• The screen properties of the cabling components must comply with the
requirements of the European EN 50173-1 standard on generic cabling
systems and with any requirements referenced therein. The European EN
50173-1 standard is derived from the global ISO/IEC 11801 standard.
• Building utilities that have integrated and screened symmetrical copper
cabling in accordance with the requirements of class D of EN 50173-1 fulfill
the condition above. Class D is also attained if components (cables,
connection boxes, connection cables, etc.) of category 5 (CAT.5) are
installed.

• In North America, UTP cabling is normally installed (US EIA/TIA 568A

standard), and the following conditions apply to the LAN connections of
communication systems there: The communication system may only be
operated with screened connection cables. This means that a screened
CAT.5 cable with a length of at least 3m must be used between the screened
LAN, WAN, and DMZ connection sockets of the communication system and
the connection to the building utilities or the connection to active external
components. The cable screen on the cable end that connects to the building
utilities or active external components must be grounded (building potential
equalization connection).

• For the LAN connection to boards in LTUs, the notes regarding the shielding
connection at the opening of the LTU frame must be observed accordingly.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 23
1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Standards and Guidelines on Installation

1.9.4 Labeling

This device complies with the EU guideline 1999/5/EC as

confirmed by the CE certificate.

This device has been manufactured in accordance with our

certified environmental management system (ISO 14001). This
process ensures that energy consumption and the use of
primary raw materials are kept to a minimum, thus reducing
waste production.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
24 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Data Protection and Data Security

1.10 Data Protection and Data Security

This telephone system uses and processes personal data, such as call detail
recording, telephone displays and customer data records.

In Germany, the processing and use of such data is subject to various regulations,
including those of the Federal Data Protection Law (Bundesdatenschutzgesetz,
BDSG). Observe all applicable laws in other countries.

The objective of privacy legislation is to prevent infringements of an individual’s

right to privacy based on the use or misuse of personal data.

By protecting data against misuse during all stages of processing, privacy legis-
lation also protects the material interests of the individual and of third parties.

The customer is responsible for ensuring that the system is installed,

operated and maintained in accordance with all applicable labor laws and
regulations and all laws and regulations relating to data protection, privacy
and safe labor environment.

Employees of Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH & Co. KG are bound

to safeguard trade secrets and personal data under the terms of the company’s
work rules.

It is imperative to observe the following rules to ensure that the statutory provi-
sions relating to service (on-site or remote) are strictly followed. This safeguards
the interests of the customer and offers added personal protection.

A conscientious and responsible approach helps protect data and ensure

privacy:

• Ensure that only authorized persons have access to customer data.

• Use the password features of the system with no exceptions. Never give
passwords to an unauthorized person orally or in writing.

• Ensure that no unauthorized person can ever process (store, modify,

transmit, disable or delete) or use customer data.

• Prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to storage media, such as

backup CDs or log printouts. This applies to service calls as well as to storage
and transport.

• Ensure that storage media which are no longer required are completely
destroyed. Ensure that no sensitive documents are left unprotected.

Work closely with your customer contact; this promotes trust and reduces
your workload.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 25
1_safety_FDS70_de.fm
Introduction and Important Notes
Documentation Feedback

1.11 Documentation Feedback

If you have questions that are not answered by this document:

• Internal employees should contact their National Support Center.

• Customers should contact their retailer or the Siemens Customer Support

Center.

When you call, state the title, ID number, and issue of the document.

Example:
• Title: HiPath 4000 V4, Service Documentation

• ID number: P31003H3140S104010020

• Issue: 2

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
26 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
System Configuration

2 Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the major system functions and components
of HiPath 4000.

This manual describes the installation of the HiPath 4000. HiPath 4000 IP
provides custom convergence applications and multimedia communications
solutions from workstation to workstation.

The HiPath 4000 supports up to 15 directly connected access points and 83

additional access points distributed over IP.

The HiPath 4000 system is designed as a free-standing system. The number of

cabinets installed in the HiPath 4000 depends on the customer configuration.

2.1 System Configuration

A HiPath 4000 stack consists of:

• 1 central control box CSPCI (Data and Switch Processor for Compact-PCI/
LAN). The CSPCI box can be installed as a standalone unit or separately
mounted in a 19" rack.

• 3 line trunk unit cabinets (LTUs) = (3x384 ports)

Stacks 2 through 4 consists of:

• 4 LTUs each (4x384 ports each)

The AC-powered redundant HiPath 4000 has a maximum of two power box
(UACD) cabinets. The DC-powered redundant HiPath 4000 has a maximum of
two, 2-stack power box cabinets.

The HiPath 4000 is available in three configurations:

• AC-powered, nonredundant

• AC-powered, redundant

• DC-powered, redundant only

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 27
2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
System Configuration

2.1.1 AC-Powered, Nonredundant HiPath 4000

The nonredundant AC-powered HiPath 4000 uses AC-to-DC shelf power
supplies (LPC80s) and DC-to-DC shelf power supplies (PSUPs). You can have a
maximum of 4 HiPath 4000 cabinet stacks (see Figure 1).

The CSPCI box (Data and Switch Processor for Compact-PCI/LAN) is located
either in stack 1 of the nonredundant AC-powered HiPath 4000, set up individ-
ually, or mounted on a separate 19" rack. The remaining three shelves are
telephony shelves called line trunk unit wide (LTUW) shelves.

The AC-powered, nonredundant HiPath 4000 allows for a maximum of up to

16,000 ports.

Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4

LPC80

LPC80

LPC80

LPC80
L80XF L80XF L80XF L80XF
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
LPC80

LPC80

LPC80

LPC80
L80XF L80XF L80XF L80XF
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
LPC80

LPC80

LPC80

LPC80
L80XF L80XF L80XF L80XF
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
LPSUC

LPSUC

LPSUC
CSPCI L80XF L80XF L80XF
PSUP

PSUP

PSUP
Figure 1 HiPath 4000, nonredundant power configuration

[Link] CSPCI Box

The shelf provides power supply and boards in one box.

IMPORTANT: This is a class A device. This equipment can cause interference

in residential areas: In this case, the operator can be required to take appropriate
measures.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
28 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
System Configuration

The CSPCI box provides switching unit (SWU) and administration and data
processor (ADP) functions.

The SWU provides:

• A common control unit that starts and controls the call processing functions
and features of the system

• A switching network that controls the voice data highways that carry infor-
mation through the system

• A service unit that provides ringing, tones, conference call switching, dual-
tone multi frequency (DTMF) button signals, and public network dial tones for
LTU boards

The ADP:

• Places the system into service

• Provides access to system administration, maintenance, and configuration

management operations (Direct AMO Dialog, UBA, HSD or RDS)

• Provides a local maintenance terminal interface

• Provides various administrative reporting and security applications

The CSPCI box is available in two configurations:

• Duplex

• Simplex Mono is not supported in the U.S.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 29
2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
System Configuration

[Link] Duplex

This configuration has two common controls (CC) and ADP. Each common
control is powered by a separate power supply. The ADP is powered by two
power supplies to ensure continuous operation during failure of one power
supply.

Slot Modules
6 SF2X8
5 DSCXL (CC-B)
4
3 FAN HDCF FAN
2 • DSCXL (CC-A) •
1 DSCXL (ADP) •
PSU (1) PSU (2)
redundant

• -> Basic shelf configuration extended with:

2 x DSCXL: S30810-Q2311-X
SF2X8: S30810-Q2309-X
RTM : S30810-Q2312-X

[Link] Mono

The following table shows the CSPCI simplex configuration (mono).

Slot Modules
6
5
4
3 FAN HDCF • FAN
2 • •
1 DSCXL (ADP) •
PSU (1) • PSU (2)
redundant

• -> Modules belong to basic shelf configuration:

PSU:ACPCI / DCPCI
Fan:C39165-A7050-B13

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
30 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
System Configuration

DSCXL: S30810-Q2311-X
RTM: S30810-Q2312-X
MCM: S30810-Q2313-X
HDCF: S30810-K2319-X300

[Link] LTUW Shelf

The line trunk unit wide (LTUW) shelf is the new version of the LTUE shelf. It
functions as an interface between the system and the external environment using
champ connectors (see Figure 2). The LTUW shelf is only available with
redundant HiPath 4000 AC and DC systems.

The LTUW shelf provides slots for:

• Two DC-to-DC shelf power supplies (PSUPs)

• 16 Peripheral slots, up to 24 ports in narrowband

• A special slot for RG or peripheral signaling interface unit (SIU)

• An LTUCA board

16 19 25 31 37 43 49 55 61 67 73 79 85 115 121 127

SIVAPAC (MDF)

SIVAPAC (MDF)

SIVAPAC (MDF)

SIVAPAC (MDF)

SIVAPAC (MDF)

SIVAPAC (MDF)

SIVAPAC (MDF)

SIVAPAC (MDF)

SIVAPAC (MDF)

SIVAPAC (MDF)

SIVAPAC (MDF)

SIVAPAC (MDF)
Champ (MDF)

Champ (MDF)

Champ (MDF)

Champ (MDF)

Champ (MDF)

Champ (MDF)

Champ (MDF)

Champ (MDF)

Champ (MDF)

Champ (MDF)

Champ (MDF)

Champ (MDF)
PSUP

PSUP
HTS
Bulk

Talk
PFI
RG/WG

RG/WG
LTUC.. board
PSUP

PSUP
BG 10

BG 15

BG 16
BG 1

BG 2

BG 3

BG 4

BG 5

BG 6

BG 7

BG 8

BG 9
WGM
RGM

Bulk

40000040ger

Figure 2 LTUW backplane (connectors)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 31
2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
System Configuration

2.1.2 AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4000

The AC-powered, redundant HiPath 4000 configuration consists of up to four
HiPath 4000 cabinet stacks and a power supply stack with up to two UACDs (unit
alternating current distribution); see Figure 3. A 2-cabinet HiPath 4000 cabinet
stack receives input power from one UACD. A third and fourth cabinet stack
requires a second UACD, which receives input power from a wall outlet (U.S.) or
a junction box (I.M.).

A fully configured AC-powered, redundant HiPath 4000 can provide up to 16,000

ports, depending on the trunk and subscriber configuration.

The HiPath 4000 system uses SIPAC LTUW shelves. SIPAC and SIVAPAC
shelves cannot be mixed in the same system.

The AC-powered, redundant HiPath 4000 allows for a maximum of up to 16,000

ports.

Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4

PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

PSUP PSUP PSUP PSUP

LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

UACD
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW
UACD 2
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

UACD 1 LTUW LTUW LTUW

CSPCI

Figure 3 HiPath 4000, AC-powered, redundant CPU configuration

Physical shelf numbering is consecutive from bottom-to-top in each cabinet.

LTUW shelves are also numbered by logical position. The LTUW logical shelf
numbering is consecutive from bottom-to-top and left-to-right in each system.

The cabinet stack layout is as follows:

• Base cabinet: ADP and SWU in a CSPCI box

• All other shelves: LTUW shelves

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
32 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
System Configuration

2.1.3 DC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4000

The DC-powered HiPath 4000 is available in a redundant configuration only. It
consists of up to four HiPath 4000 cabinet stacks and up to two power supply
stacks with as many as four UDCDs (unit direct current distribution) each; see
Figure 4. Each DC-powered HiPath 4000 cabinet stack receives input power from
one UDCD. The UDCD receives input power from a DC power system.

A fully configured, DC-powered HiPath 4000 can provide up to 16,000 ports,

depending on the trunk and subscriber configuration.

The HiPath 4000 system uses SIPAC LTUW shelves. SIPAC and SIVAPAC
shelves cannot be mixed in the same system.

Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4

PSU PSU

PSU PSU

PSU PSU

PSU PSU
LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW
PSU PSU PSU

PSU PSU PSU

PSU PSU PSU

PSU PSU PSU

UDCD UDCD

LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

UDCD 4 UDCD 2

LTUW LTUW LTUW LTUW

PSU

PSU PSU

PSU PSU

PSU PSU
UDCD 3 UDCD 1
LTUW LTUW LTUW
PSU

PSU

PSU
CSPCI

Figure 4 HiPath 4000, DC-powered, cabinet layout

Physical shelf numbering is consecutive from bottom-to-top in each cabinet.

LTUW shelves are also numbered by logical position. The LTUW logical shelf
numbering is consecutive from bottom-to-top and left-to-right in each system.

The cabinet stack layout is as follows:

• Base cabinet: ADP and SWU in a CSPCI box

• All other shelves: LTUW shelves

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 33
2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
System Configuration

2.1.4 AP 3700 Cabinets

With HiPath 4000 V2.0, new 19" shelves (AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13) are used for
system expansion. These 19" shelves can be used in a 19" cabinet or a
standalone configuration (see Figure 5).

AP 3700-9 (9 slots) in 19"

cabinet or as standalone
configuration
HiPath 4000
AP3700-9 *N -G5412-X
S C
UP/UPR 3 T U x
(L80XF/ M I
I 4 C
LTUW) 4 P
LUN LUN LUN C
UP/UPR A2 A2 A2 I
2(L80XF/LTUW)

UP/UPR
1(L80XF/LTUW)
AP 3700-13 (13 slots) only
UCS
CSPCI in 19" cabinet
RTM
AP 3700-13L *-G5413-X
T
U
C
A
LUN LUN LUN LUN
A2 A2 A2 A2

Figure 5 AP 3700 connections

2.1.5 Survivability Server

The Survivability Server takes over operation of the access points if central
control fails. It can only be used in AP 3700 IP access points.

However, Survivability Server can control all types of IPDA access points
(AP 3300 IP, AP 3500 IP, AP 3700 IP) in emergency situations, regardless of
whether the access points are equipped with NCUI(1) or NCUI2.

Survivability Server consists of a cassette with a cPCI backplane, DSCXL

processor, HDMO/HDCF module, power supply unit and redundant fan trays.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
34 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
System Configuration

Depending on the power supply module used, it can be operated with an 110/
230Vac or 48 Vdc supply.
In AP 3700 IP, there is no electrical connection between the access point and the
server.

The Survivability Server and NCUI of the same access point communicate with
each other exclusively via the IP network (see also the service manual for "HiPath
4000 V4.0 IP Solutions, IPDA&APE").

Fan tray

Power supply module

HDMO/HDCF
board

Figure 6 Survivability Server slide-in shelf

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 35
2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
Switching Units

2.2 Switching Units

The switching unit (SWU) consists of a common control unit function, a switching
network function, and a service unit function.

The HiPath 4000’s SWU functionality is implemented in the DSCXL board. The
DSCXL board acts as common control unit and provides switching network and
service unit functions, and Siemens LAN connectivity, through the SL200 board.

NOTE: This 2-board set also provides the ADP functions.

2.2.1 Common Control Units

The common control unit performs and controls the call processing functions and
features of the system. These functions are distributed among the various
hardware subcomponents in the common control cabinet.

The HiPath 4000 SWU common control subcomponents are:

• DSCXL board (data processor controller 586) with LAN and 256 MB of
dynamic memory

• RTM board as interface between LTU and processor shelves

• Clock generator function included on the RTM board (memory time switch
with clock generator MTSCG)

• SF2x8 board for LAN connections

2.2.2 Switching Networks

The switching network is a time-division switching matrix that controls the voice
data highways that carry the flow of information through the system. Voice data
highways provide the communication channels between the switching network,
the telephony shelves, and the service unit.

The memory time switch section of the RTM board performs the switching
network function in a HiPath 4000 system. In large systems the signaling
interface and conference expanded (SICOE) board provides additional memory
time switching functionality.

The SWU DSXCL board and common control boards control the RTM board over
the multibus.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
36 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
Switching Units

2.2.3 Service Units

The service unit function provides ringing, tones, conference call switching, dual-
tone multifrequency (DTMF) button signals, and public network dial tones for
telephony boards.

The service unit functions in a HiPath 4000 are distributed among the following:

• SICOE board

• Signaling interface unit peripheral extended (SIUX2) board

• Ring generator

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 37
2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
Telephony Shelves

2.3 Telephony Shelves

Telephony shelves provide the interface between the system and the external
environment including the following:

• Telephone and maintenance terminal stations

• Trunks and network services (public and private)

• Devices connected to internal servers

NOTE: Certain devices and applications can be, or must be, directly inter-
faced to the internal or external server. This is accomplished using the
DSCXL, HUBC, LAN connection, SL200, or PSIO board. Refer to the HiPath
4000 Service Manual for additional information about these boards.

Type of telephony cabinet:

• Internal telephony cabinet—L80XF or LTUW cabinet
The functional components of the L80XF or LTUW cabinets consists of:

– LTUCA board (Line Trunk Unit Controller Advanced)

– Subscriber-line module boards

– Trunk module boards

– LTU signal cables

2.4 External Servers

The HiPath 4000 applications operate in dedicated internal or external servers,
allowing the SWU to be dedicated to call processing services. Internal servers
always reside in the CSPCI boxes. External servers reside outside the cabinets.
Refer to Table 1 for an overview of the server types and the applicable applica-
tions.

Server Types
Applications Administrative External
Data Processor Server
(ADP)
Administrative data processor X
PhoneMail X
Xpressions X
CallBridge X

Table 1 Server types and applications overview

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
38 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
External Servers

Server Types
HiPath 4000 Manager X
HiPath ProCenter Standard and Advanced X
Hicom Trading System X

Table 1 Server types and applications overview

2.4.1 Administrative Data Processor (ADP)

The ADP is the primary internal server and is a mandatory component of all
systems. Its main function is administration and maintenance of the system.

The standard functions of the ADP are:

• System startup

• Direct AMO dialog (DAD) access for configuration administration

• Remote maintenance administration (RMA)

• Local maintenance terminal interface

• Call Detail Recording

• Traffic metering and statistics

[Link] System Startup

The ADP is responsible for commissioning (placing into service) the system.

The commissioning sequence occurs after powering on a system and after a

software- or hardware-initiated system restart (reload or hard restart only).

The ADP also reloads flashware and loadware on a subsystem level (ADP, SWU,
and ACD secondary server) and an individual module level (after deactivation
and activation of boards).

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 39
2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
External Servers

The commissioning sequence is as follows:

• Startup of ADP:

– Loading ADP common control unit flashware

– Loading ADP common control unit software

– Starting basic operation of ADP common control unit

– Initializing the ADP interface ports

– Loading the ADP interface ports

– Starting the ADP interface ports

• Startup of switching unit:

– Loading SWU flashware

– Loading SWU software

– Starting basic operation of the SWU

– Copying Unixware command file for database

– Generating the database

– Loading the loadware on telephony boards

– Starting telephony boards

– Starting the call processing operation

[Link] Direct AMO Dialog (DAD) Access

The HiPath 4000 Manager provides direct command line access for adminis-
tration and troubleshooting configuration and system problems.

[Link] Remote Maintenance and Administration

The Unixware-based RMA application provides major and minor alarm reporting.

RMA requires a CCA II (asynchronous) modem to support the following:

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
40 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
External Servers

[Link] Local Maintenance Terminal Interface

This interface provides for the physical connection of a maintenance terminal to

the ADP and access to Unixware applications.

[Link] Call Detail Recording

CDR provides traffic statistics for monitoring system activity and evaluating
system performance. CDR statistics can also be used by the traffic metering and
statistics application.

[Link] Traffic Metering and Statistics Application

This program is a Unixware-based application that analyzes system performance

and generates tabular data for evaluating and optimizing system resources.

[Link] System Security

Application software in the ADP provides for system security. The system admin-
istrator uses the software to assign user passwords and control the access level
of those passwords. This prevents unauthorized access to the system and to
critical system files, databases, and administration or maintenance facilities.

[Link] RDS

Realtime Diagnostics System (RDS), formerly trunk diagnostics system (TDS), is

a diagnostic tool that provides telephony fault localization for station and data
lines and limited trunk fault reporting capabilities for trunk facility problems. It
provides tools and features that allow you to solve line and trunk problems more
efficiently

[Link] HSD

The hardware and symptom diagnosis (HSD) tool is a browser-based application

that resides on the Primergy server. HSD functionality consists of menu choices
within the HiPath 4000 Manager client application. HSD can be used either
remotely or locally. It is designed to improve usability, reduce service time, reduce
cost, and enhance serviceability.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 41
2_Uebersicht.fm
Overview
Internal Servers

2.5 Internal Servers

Internal servers are optionally available in all HiPath 4000 systems. The internal
servers are configured in the DSCXL board.

2.5.1 Internal Server Common Control Unit

The internal server common control unit administers and controls the functions
and features of the application software running on the internal server. It consists
of the following subcomponents:

• DSCXL board

• SF2x8 board

Each of the common control unit boards interface with one another over the
multibus/PCI bus.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
42 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Installation Procedures Matrix

3 Preparing for Installation

This chapter contains important information and describes the steps involved in
installing cabinets with main distribution frames.

3.1 Installation Procedures Matrix

Installation Steps Refer to: OK?

1. Prepare for installation
a) Installation materials. Section 3.2, “Installation Materials”
b) Verify the site. Section 3.3, “Conducting the Site
Verification”
c) Receive the system. Section 3.4, “Receiving the System”
d) Inspect for shipping Section 3.5, “Inspecting for Shipping
damages. Damage”

e) Remove the system from its Section 3.6, “Removing the System
packaging. from its Packaging”

f) Remove the system from the Section 3.7, “Unloading a System with
pallet. a Roller Base from the Pallet”

g) Position the cabinets. Section 3.8, “Positioning the

Cabinets”
h) Level the cabinets. Section 3.9, “Leveling the Cabinets”
i) Remove the front covers. Section 3.10, “Removing the Front
Covers”
j) Remove the back covers. Section 3.10.3, “AP 3300 Back
Covers”
k) Check and read the labels in Section 3.11, “Important Labels on the
the cabinets. System”

l) Inventory the system Section 3.12, “Inventorying the

hardware. System Hardware”

m) Inventory the system Section 3.13, “Inventorying the

software. System Software”

n) Inventory the installation kit. Section 3.14, “Inventorying the Instal-

lation Kit”
o) Perform pre-installation trunk Section 3.15, “Pre-Installation Trunk
procedures. Procedures”

p) Install seismic anchors, if Section 3.16, “Installing Seismic

applicable. Anchors”

Table 1 Installation matrix

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 43
3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Installation Procedures Matrix

Installation Steps Refer to: OK?

q) Install the cable channels. Section 3.18, “Installing the Cable
Channels”
2. Ground the HiPath 4000.
a) Ground the MDF, I.M. Section 6.1, “Grounding the MDF,
I.M.”
b) Connect and ground the Section 6.2, “Connecting and
cabinets. Grounding the Cabinets”

c) Ground the system. Section 6.3, “Grounding the System,

I.M.”
Section 6.4, “Grounding the System,
U.S.”
3. Connect the power supply.
a) Connect to the mains. Section 7.1, “Connecting to the Mains”
b) Install a three-phase Section 7.2, “Installing a Three-Phase
connection. Network”

c) Install a single-phase Section 7.3, “Installing a Single-Phase

connection. Network”

d) Install a three-phase or Section 7.5, “Installing a Three-Phase

single-phase connection with or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-
Point Grounding, I.M.”
mid-point grounding.
e) Connecting the Battery to the Section 7.13.1, “Connecting the
Power Box, I.M. Battery to the Power Box, I.M.”

f) Connect the MDF (I.M.). Section 7.19.1, “Connecting the MDF

for a Redundant System, I.M.”
g) Connect the power box to the Section 7.19, “Connecting the Power
system. Box to the System”

4. Install the signal cables. Section 8.1, “Installing Signal Cables”

5. Install the service alarm cable Section 8.2, “Installing the Service
and trunk bypass. Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass”

6. Install the external cables. Section , “External Cabling Assem-

blies”
7. Install the peripheral equipment, if Section , “Installing Peripheral
applicable. Equipment”

8. Install the IPDA, if applicable. Section , “Installing the IPDA”

9. Start the system.
a) Perform pre-power-on Section 12.2, “Pre-Power On Checks”
checks.
b) Apply power to the HiPath Sections 12.3 to 12.9
4000.
Table 1 Installation matrix

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
44 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Installation Procedures Matrix

Installation Steps Refer to: OK?

c) Enable the clock batteries. Section 12.10, “Activating the Clock
Battery on the DSCXL Board”
d) Set the date and time. Section 12.11, “Setting the Date and
Time”
e) Install the database. Section 12.12, “Installing the
Customer Database”
f) Start the HiPath 4000. Section 12.13, “Starting the System”
g) Connect to the maintenance Section 12.14, “Connecting to the
terminal. TAP, I.M.”

h) Replace the covers. Section 12.15, “Replacing the Covers”

10. Verify the System.
a) Check the boards. Section 13.2, “Checking the Boards”
b) Check the cables. Section 13.3, “Checking the Cables”
c) Check and test the features. Section 13.4, “Checking and Testing
the Features”
d) Test the restart and failure Section 13.5, “Testing the Restart and
transfer function. Failure Transfer Function”

e) Backup the customer data. Section 13.6, “Backing up the

Customer Data”
f) Set and activate the HTS Section 13.7, “Setting and Activating
function. the HTS Function”

g) Verify the ring generator. Section 13.8, “Checking the Ring

Generator”
h) Verify the station-to-MDF Section 13.9, “Verifying the Station-to-
connections. MDF Connections”

i) Verify transmission facilities. Section 13.10, “Verifying Trans-

mission Facilities”
j) Verify the MO disk. Section 13.11, “Verifying the MO-Disk
Drive”
k) Verify the hard disk. Section 13.12, “Verifying the Hard
Disk”
l) Verify the operation of system Section 13.13, “Verifying the
features and servers. Operation of System Features and
Servers”
m) Verify the system bypass Section 13.14, “Verifying the System
Bypass”
Table 1 Installation matrix

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 45
3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Installation Materials

3.2 Installation Materials

The installation materials used to build your system are provided in the system
assignment list. This list is produced on a customer-specific basis and is supplied
with the system. Table 2 lists the standard tools that are used in installing the
HiPath 4000.

NOTE: Check your tools regularly. Only use intact tools.

Tools Size
Allen key wrenches Complete set
Cable stripper
Channel lock pliers, large
Communication technician’s pliers
Compass saw
Cross-head screwdriver (Phillips screwdriver in the
U.S.)
Diagonal cutting pliers
Drill
Gloves
Hammer 400 g
Insertion tool (board removal and replacement tool in the
U.S.)
Level
Meter stick (yardstick in the U.S.)
Module key (board removal and replacement tool in the
U.S.)
Ring or flat spanners (open-ended socket wrench in the 8 mm to 19 mm (.3 to .7 in)
U.S.)
Socket spanner set (socket wrench in the U.S.) 10 mm to 19 mm (.4 in to .7 in)
Screwdrivers 2 mm to 8 mm
In the U.S.: Phillips (no. 2 and
no. 3) and flat-blade (3/16 inch
by 4 inch)
Seismic anchor kit (if applicable)
Side cutter
Soldering iron
Spirit level (level in the U.S.)
Stripping knife
Telephone pliers (long-nose pliers)

Table 2 Standard installation tools

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
46 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Conducting the Site Verification

Tools Size
Terminal crimping pliers (crimpers in the U.S.) Up to 50 mm (2 in)
Torx screwdrivers Complete set
Wrench, hex key, 6 mm
Wrench, hex socket, 7/32 inch
Wrist band and conductive pad (ESD equipment in the
U.S.)

Table 2 Standard installation tools

The following tools are required for pre-installation tasks:

• Scissors

• Screwdriver, flat-blade 3/16 inch by 4 inches

• Screwdriver, Phillips no. 3

• Wrench, 8-inch adjustable

• Wrench, 10-mm hex socket

• Wrench, 9/16-inch hex socket

3.3 Conducting the Site Verification

Arrange for a qualified electrical contractor to conduct a walk-through with you
and check the site for customer compliance to site engineering conditions,
including power and grounding, cabinet and peripheral space allocations and
safety requirements. In the U.S., customer site requirements are specified in the
following documents:

• Site map

• Customer Site Planning Guide

• Power and Grounding Guide and Specifications.

3.4 Receiving the System

On delivery to customer facilities, the following components are already installed:
modules, power supplies, MO disk drive and hard disks. The packing list, bill of
materials, and hardware map are also shipped with the system.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 47
3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Inspecting for Shipping Damage

3.5 Inspecting for Shipping Damage

Before accepting the delivery of any equipment:

1. List any obvious external damage on the shipping documents, then ask the
delivery personnel to sign the documents.

2. Handle any damage according to local procedures.

3.6 Removing the System from its Packaging

7 CAUTION
Risk of injury when unpacking the system
Never try to lift heavy objects without assistance.

To remove the system from its packaging:

1. Cut and dispose the pallet strapping.

2. Remove and dispose of packing materials.

3. Examine the system for damages during transportation.

4. Record and report any damages according to local procedures or the appro-
priate service center.

7 WARNING
Electric shock caused by damaged material
Replace the power cable immediately if it shows any signs of damage. Replace
any damaged safety equipment (covers, labels and ground wires) immediately.

3.7 Unloading a System with a Roller Base from the Pallet

IMPORTANT: Place the pallet as close to the equipment room as possible before
removing the cabinet.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
48 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Positioning the Cabinets

To remove a system with a roller base from the pallet (see Figure 1):

1. At the base of the cabinet, remove the screws on the left and right sides of
the pallet.

2. Tilt the system slightly to one side (1) and slide out the crosspiece (2). Repeat
this procedure on the other side.

3. Push the two boards to the middle (3) and slide them out (4).

4. Place the system at the designated installation location.

5. Secure the casters (5) by pressing the caster locks downwards.

NOTE: Secure all four casters (only for a 3 or 4-cabinet system) to prevent the
system from rolling away. Lock the rollers once the system is installed or moved.

5
4 3

Figure 1 Removing the pallet (system with a roller base)

3.8 Positioning the Cabinets

In multicabinet systems, position cabinet 1 in the equipment room first, then
position the additional cabinets.

To position the cabinet in the equipment room:

1. Unlock the casters by lifting the caster locks upwards on the cabinet leveling
assembly (see Figure 2).

2. Roll the cabinet into the location specified by the equipment room floor plan.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 49
3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Leveling the Cabinets

3. Lock the casters by pushing the lock on the cabinet leveling assembly
downwards.

To unlock

To lock

Figure 2 Caster locks

3.9 Leveling the Cabinets

This chapter describes how to level a system with a roller base or with a
standalone cabinet.

3.9.1 Leveling a Roller Base

To level the cabinets (see Figure 3):

1. Use a wrench to loosen the lock nut on the caster (1).

2. Use the Allen wrench to adjust the height of the caster (2).

3. Once the height is adjusted, tighten the lock nuts.

1 2

Figure 3 Leveling the casters

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
50 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Leveling the Cabinets

3.9.2 Leveling an AP 3700-9 (Standalone)

IMPORTANT: This procedure applies only for the AP3700-9. The AP3700-13
cabinet should only be installed in a 19" shelf and is not intended for standalone
installation.

To level the cabinet (see Figure 4):

1. Use a wrench to loosen the lock nut (1) on the caster.

2. Adjust the height of the foot by turning the wrench (2) left or right.

3. Once the height is adjusted, tighten the lock nut (1).

1
2
Figure 4 Leveling the feet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 51
3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Removing the Front Covers

3.10 Removing the Front Covers

This chapter describes how to remove the covers on the relevant system
cabinets.

3.10.1 AP 3300 Front Covers

To remove the front covers in a HiPath 4000:

1. Find the two slots under the front cover (see arrows under the front cover on
Figure 5).).

2. Insert a 5/8-in. (or smaller) flat-blade screwdriver into each of the two slots
and push hard (until you hear a click) to release the cover.

Slot Slot

Figure 5 Removing the front covers (1)

3. Pull the bottom part of the front cover away from the cabinet and lift upwards
(see Figure 6).

4. Place the cover in a safe location.

Figure 6 Removing the front covers (2)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
52 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Removing the Front Covers

3.10.2 AP 3700 Front Covers

The covers are only used with the standalone version (AP3700-9). These covers
are only snapped into guide slots in the housing. They can easily be removed by
pulling them toward the front (see Figure 7).

The back covers can be removed in the same way, by pulling them toward the
back.

Figure 7 Removing the AP 3700-9 cover

3.10.3 AP 3300 Back Covers

To remove the back covers:

1. At the top of the cabinet, remove the screw on the top cover with a flat-blade
screwdriver (see Figure 8 and Figure 9).

2. Using two hands, lift the cover upwards to disengage it from the cabinet frame
mounting bracket.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 53
3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Removing the Front Covers

Screw

Cover latches

Cabinet frame
mounting
bracket

Figure 8 Removing the back cover

2 3
1

Figure 9 Removing the back cover of a base cabinet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
54 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Removing the Front Covers

3. If the system contains multiple cabinets, remove the remaining covers from
the lower cabinets by following step 2 (see Figure 10).

4. Place the cover in a safe location.

Figure 10 Removing the back cover of the lower cabinet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 55
3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Important Labels on the System

3.11 Important Labels on the System

Upon removing the covers, pay attention to the labels that are on the system (see
Figure 11, Figure 12, and Figure 13).

MULTIPLE SOURCES OF POWER

! Refer to service Manual

before removing covers.

Figure 11 Cover label

WARNING
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Earth Connection Required
Before Connecting Supply

! AVERTISSEMENT
COURANT DE FUITE ELEVE
Raccordement a la terre
indispensable avant
le raccordement au reseau

Figure 12 High leakage current label

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
56 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Important Labels on the System

4000. AC4 4000. DC

Front Rear Front Rear

HiPath 4000 4000 AC nonre- Compliance High leakage

series dundant, V32905- V32905-B22-X107, current label
Compliance B22-X106, 1 per stack V32905-B23-
labels 1 per stack X204,
MSOP
UACD Compliance V32905-B23-X201 UDCD
V32905-B22-X111 with second stack

MSOP
V32905-B23-
Compliance
X201 with
V32905-B22-X108
second cabinet

40000120ger2
Figure 13 Locations of the labels on the system

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 57
3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Inventorying the System Hardware

3.12 Inventorying the System Hardware

To verify each cabinet hardware

1. Compare the hardware in the cabinet against the packing slip, bill of
materials, and hardware map.

2. Handle any discrepancies according to local procedures and record them on

the Installation Report form.

3.13 Inventorying the System Software

The system hard disk contains the latest correction version (KV) load or system
call processing software along with the RMX and Unixware operating system.

A backup software (customer database) is supplied in the MO drive.

3.14 Inventorying the Installation Kit

IMPORTANT: An installation kit is shipped with each system.

To inventory the installation kit, refer to the packing list that accompanies the
system.

3.15 Pre-Installation Trunk Procedures

To prepare for trunk installation:

1. Obtain the following trunk information from the facility provider:

• Trunk installation schedule of the Facility provider

• Grade of service to be delivered

• Trunk circuit identification—this identifies the trunk circuit to the telephone

company

• RJ21X pin assignments

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
58 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Installing Seismic Anchors

• Maintenance limits

IMPORTANT: The facility provider has maintenance limits that determine

how much the circuit loss can vary before the facility provider responds to
correct it.

2. Confirm with the facility provider coordinator that all trunk testing has been
scheduled with the telephone company or vendor.

3.16 Installing Seismic Anchors

Depending on the regulations in your state or country, you may be required to
install seismic anchors. Consult your facility’s technical personnel if your instal-
lation requires seismic anchors; refer to the procedure described below.

The following information about installation of seismic anchors is based on the

2001 California Building Code.

To install the seismic anchors:

1. Ensure that the earthquake kits are supported on a floor located at or below
grade level of the building.

2. Ensure that a qualified engineer reviews the anchorage and adequacy of the
floor for the following conditions:

• The concrete is normal weight stone aggregate concrete with a

compressive strength of a least 2,000 psi.

• If on-site concrete specifications are not available, strength is determined

by testing cores, if required by OSHPD.

• The floor slab is at least 4 inches thick and capable of supporting loads
imposed by the equipment.

• Drilled-in anchors must be used on prestressed concrete floors (pre- or

post-tensioned) unless tension wires are positively located (refer to step
5).

3. Install the anchors in accordance with applicable provisions of the Interna-

tional Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) Evaluation Report and
manufacturer’s recommendations (refer to Fischerwerke Artur Fischer GMBH
& Co. KG, D-72178 Tumlingen, Waldachtal, Germany).

4. Perform a load test of 50% of the anchors in accordance with the California
Department of General Services, division of State Architect, Interpretation of
Regulations Document 19-1, September 1, 1999 (reference, Expansion Bolts

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 59
3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Stacking HiPath 4000 Cabinets

or Epoxy Type Anchors in Concrete).

There are two methods for load testing the anchors:

– Hydraulic Ram Method—the test load for the 12 mm anchors in tension is

3200 lbs.

– Torque Wrench Method—the installation torque is 35 ft-lbs according to

manufacturer’s specifications. The test torque must be reached within
one-half turn of the nut. Torque testing can occur on an individual basis if
test procedures have been submitted to and approved by OSHPD.

5. When installing drilled-in anchors into existing pre-stressed concrete (pre- or

post-tensioned), locate the prestressed tendons by using non-destructive
methods before installation.

NOTE: Use extreme care and caution when you install drilled-in anchors in
existing non-prestressed reinforced concrete to avoid cutting or damaging the
existing reinforcing bars and tension wires during installation.

6. Maintain a minimum clearance of one inch between the reinforcement and

the drilled-in anchor.

7. The M8 high-strength bolts that connect the bracket to the cabinet frame are
Grade 5. Tighten the bolts to 35-40 ft-lbs. to ensure that they do not slip in the
slotted holes.

3.17 Stacking HiPath 4000 Cabinets

The factory ships the HiPath 4000 cabinets already stacked according to config-
uration of the system that has been ordered (see Figure 14 for an example).

To add cabinets to the system, refer to Section , “Adding Cabinets to the System”.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
60 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Installing the Cable Channels

SIEMENS

HiPath 4000

Figure 14 HiPath 4000 stacked cabinets (front view)

3.18 Installing the Cable Channels

To install the cable channels:

1. At the back of the base cabinet, place the cable channel against the cabinet
as shown in Figure 15.

2. Secure the cable channels with screws.

Screw
Screw location
location
Cable
channels
Screw
location
Figure 15 Cable channels

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 61
3_Montagevorbereitungen.fm
Preparing for Installation
Installing the Cable Channels

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
62 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 4_Montagehinweise.fm
Special Installation Notes
Removing 24-Port Boards

4 Special Installation Notes

This chapter provides special instructions about installing the HiPath 4000.

4.1 Removing 24-Port Boards

Always follow the electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention procedure when you
remove and replace boards. Failure to follow ESD prevention procedures can
result in permanent or intermittent board failures. Refer to the HiPath 4000
Service Manual for step-by-step ESD prevention procedures.

NOTE: Follow the electrostatic discharge prevention procedures.

- Always put on the ESD wrist strap on your bare wrist before you touch any of
the boards or assemblies.

Only transport the boards in ESD protective packaging.

Always place and work with the boards on a grounded conductive pad.

7 WARNING
Risk of electric shock while working on the power system
To avoid electrical shock, never wear the ESD wrist strap while working on the
power system or at the back of the cabinet. Danger of electric shock!

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 63
4_Montagehinweise.fm
Special Installation Notes
Removing 24-Port Boards

To remove or install boards:

1. Only use the supplied board removal and replacement tool (see Figure 1).

2. Refer to the markings on the board removal and replacement tool for instruc-
tions on how to use it.

Removing the board Installing the board

Figure 1 Removing and installing the board

4.1.1 SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC Adapter

A SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC board adapter (Adapter 1) is used to adapt 16-port boards
with SIVAPAC connectors to shelves with SIPAC connectors.

The installed Adapter 1 makes the 16-port boards protrude from the shelf, a little
farther than the 24-port boards. To lock the 16-port boards into position, special
latches are provided above (black) and below (gray) the shelf. When the adapters
are installed, only the gray latches lock into place.

IMPORTANT: The Adapter 1 has three pieces: one power-up module and two
adapter modules (see Figure 3).

Once installed, never remove the board adapters.

You must install the 16-port adapters manually, as they cannot be installed using
the board removal and replacement tool. You cannot use this tool to seat boards
with gray latches into place. To remove the boards, follow the instructions in
Section 4.1, “Removing 24-Port Boards”.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
64 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 4_Montagehinweise.fm
Special Installation Notes
Removing 24-Port Boards

To install the board adapter (see Figure 2 and Figure 3):

1. Release the gray latch in front of the board.

2. Remove the board from the shelf.

3. Face the backplane connector of the board toward yourself.

4. On the adapter module (labeled 1 and 2), slightly pull the catch hooks apart.

5. Position the adapter module over the backplane connector of the board.

6. Ensure that the outer edge of each adapter module corresponds with each
outer edge of the board.

7. Ensure that each adapter module’s outermost row of pins is aligned with the
outermost row of the board connector, then insert the module into the
connector.

8. Snap on the catch hooks.

9. Install the other module onto the board connect.

IMPORTANT: If the clearance between the board connector and the hot plug
connector on the board is not sufficient for the module catch hook, loosen the
two hot plug connector screws on the back of the board and adjust location
to allow the catch hook to fit between the hot plug and the board connector.

10. Insert the power-up module (3) into the hot plug connector of the board.

1 3 2
Figure 2 Installing SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC adapter 1 (1 of 2)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 65
4_Montagehinweise.fm
Special Installation Notes
Removing 24-Port Boards

Adapter modules
711
RK/9 6
5-B

Power-up module
8-A19
C3922

ter 1
Adap s
en
Siem

Catch hook 711

RK/9 6
5-B
8-A19
C3922

ter 1
Adap s
en
Siem

Catch hook

Component
side
LEDs

40000038ger
Figure 3 Installing SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC adapter 1 (2 of 2)

4.1.2 Installing the Adapter 2

An adapter 2 is a SIPAC-to-SIVAPAC board adapter. Use an Adapter 2 to adapt
boards with SIPAC connectors to shelves with SIVAPAC connectors.

IMPORTANT: The board Adapter 2 comes in three pieces: one power-up

module and two adapter modules (see Figure 4).
Once installed, never remove the board adapters.

To install the board adapter 2 (see Figure 4):

1. Face the backplane connector of the board toward yourself.

2. Insert the power-up module into the middle section of the backplane
connector as shown in Figure 4.

3. On the adapter module, slightly pull the catch hooks apart.

4. Position the adapter module over the backplane connector of the board.
Ensure that the outer edge of each adapter module corresponds with each
outer edge of the board as shown in Figure 4.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
66 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 4_Montagehinweise.fm
Special Installation Notes
Removing 24-Port Boards

5. Ensure that each adapter module’s outermost row of pins is aligned with the
outermost row of the board connector, then insert the module into the
connector.

6. Snap on the catch hooks.

7. If the catch hooks do not correctly lock, the adapter module is incorrectly
positioned. Reverse the position of the module and repeat the step.

8. Perform steps 3 through 7 for the other adapter module.

Adapter modules
512
RK/9 8

Power-up module
195-B
28-A
C392

ter 2
Adap s
To SIVAPAC
backplane
en
Siem

512
RK/9 8
195-B
28-A
C392

ter 2
Adap s
en

Catch hook
Siem

Catch hook

Component
side

LEDs
40000039ger
Figure 4 Installing SIPAC-to-SIVAPAC board adapter 2

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 67
4_Montagehinweise.fm
Special Installation Notes
Installing 24DA Splitting Strips on an Old Main Distribution Frame

4.2 Installing 24DA Splitting Strips on an Old Main Distribution Frame

An old main distribution frame (16DA) can sometimes feature 24DA splitting
strips. Proceed as follows in these situations:

1. Fasten a screw on the applicable adapter strap to the left-hand side of the
splitting strip, as shown in Figure 5.

2. Fasten a screw on the second adapter strap to the right-hand side of the
splitting strip, as shown in Figure 6.

3. Fasten a screw on the left-hand side of the pre-assembled splitting strip to the
MDF as shown in Figure 7 (1).

4. Fasten a screw on the right-hand adapter strap of the pre-assembled splitting

strip to the MDF (2).

Figure 5 24DA splitting strips adapter strap, left

Figure 6 24DA splitting strip adapter strap, right

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
68 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 4_Montagehinweise.fm
Special Installation Notes
Installing 24DA Splitting Strips on an Old Main Distribution Frame

1
2

Figure 7 24DA splitting strip on an old main distribution frame

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 69
4_Montagehinweise.fm
Special Installation Notes
Installing AP 3700 Cabinets in 19-Inch Cabinets

4.3 Installing AP 3700 Cabinets in 19-Inch Cabinets

When installing a multiple-cabinet system in a 19-inch cabinet, each system
cabinet must be installed one at a time.

The following components are needed for installing a system cabinet:

• Two cabinet-specific bearing elbows with an ultimate load > 40 kg supplied

by the 19-inch cabinet vendor.

• Two support brackets (order number C39165-A7075-D1), included in the

system cabinet scope of delivery.

Figure 8 Bearing elbow and support bracket for AP 3700 in the 19-inch
cabinet

Sequence of installation:

1. Remove all four feet on the system cabinet.

Do this by loosening the lock nuts (1) on the feet (see Section 3.9, “Leveling
the Cabinets”) using an open-ended socket wrench (wrench diameter = 13
mm). Turn the feet completely outwards.

2. Secure both support brackets (A, in Figure 8) to the sides of the system box
with four of the screws supplied.

3. Secure a right and left bearing elbow (B, in Figure 8) in the 19-inch cabinet
with the screws provided.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
70 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 4_Montagehinweise.fm
Special Installation Notes
Installing AP 3700 Cabinets in 19-Inch Cabinets

4. Lift the system cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet and sit the cabinet on the two
bearing elbows (B, inFigure 8). Push the cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet until
the front edge of the cabinet is flush with the front of the 19-inch frame.

7 CAUTION
Risk of injury when lifting heavy objects/loads
Always seek assistance before lifting a system cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet -
never do it on your own.

5. Secure the system cabinet to the frame of the 19-inch cabinet by means of
the two support brackets (A, in Figure 8) and the screws provided. Make sure
the minimum play specified for the system cabinets is provided (see Section
5.8.3, “AP 3700 Configuration Rules and Examples with 19" Cabinets”).

6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to install additional expansion cabinets.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 71
4_Montagehinweise.fm
Special Installation Notes
Shielding Connection on the Opening of the LTU Frame

4.4 Shielding Connection on the Opening of the LTU Frame

NOTE: The shield of all front cables (except network cables and optical fiber
cables) must be secured to the frame with two cable ties at the shelf opening.

Figure 9 Securing the cable shield

IMPORTANT: System cables with pre-stripped sections must be used for LTU
frames.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
72 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Standard Cabinet Installation

5 Installation Variants
This chapter provides schematic representations for the various HIPath 4000
system installations. For illustrations or IPDA installations, refer to the associated
chapter. Unless otherwise noted, all illustrations apply to both U.S. and I.M. instal-
lations.

5.1 Standard Cabinet Installation

This section describes the different ways to install the cabinets depending on the
individual requirements of each customer.

IMPORTANT: Each cabinet, including the front cover, forms a shielded unit.
Cabinets should be locked while the system is running and the cover should be
replaced following testing and maintenance.

5.1.1 Single-Cabinet Installation

IMPORTANT: The dimensions shown in these illustrations are minimum dimen-

sions in millimeters (mm).

Figure 1 shows a diagram of a single-cabinet installation.

90 mm

SIEME
125 mm
110 mm

460 mm
550 mm
HiPath

720 mm 150 mm 350 mm

773 mm 515 mm

Figure 1 Single-cabinet installation

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 73
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Multiple Cabinet Installation

5.2 Multiple Cabinet Installation

IMPORTANT: The dimensions shown in the following illustration are minimum

dimensions in millimeters (mm).

Figure 2 shows a diagram of a multiple cabinet installation.

500
25 1840
SIEMENS
HiPath 4000

425 150 350

1415

400

1015

400

615 65

525 335

15 125
25 90
65

Max. 4 cabinets per stack 515

650
Figure 2 Multiple cabinet installation

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
74 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
AC-to-DC Power Box Installation

5.3 AC-to-DC Power Box Installation

IMPORTANT: The AC power box is called a unit alternating current distribution

(UACD) power supply.

IMPORTANT: The dimensions shown in the following illustration are minimum

dimensions in millimeters (mm).

Figure 3 shows the dimensions of the UACD.

1310

610

700

90

550
720
650

Figure 3 UACD

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 75
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
DC-to-DC Power Box Installation

5.4 DC-to-DC Power Box Installation

IMPORTANT: The DC power box is known as a unit direct current distribution

(UDCD) power supply.

IMPORTANT: The dimensions shown in the following illustration are minimum

dimensions in millimeters (mm).

Figure 4 shows the dimensions of a 2-stack UDCD.

Z Z Z
1535
Y Y Y I
O
D T T T C UDCD(b)
R R R B
P O O O P 610
N N N

Z Z Z 925
O Y Y Y I
D T T T C
R R R
P
O O O
B
P
UDCD(a)
N N N

315
BUA 225 Base unit
90
Front view 550
720 650

Figure 4 UDCD

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
76 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Free-Standing Installation

5.5 Free-Standing Installation

IMPORTANT: The CSPCI box, including the front cover, forms a shielded unit.
Free slots must be covered.

5.5.1 CSPCI Box in UCS Shelf, Stack 1

In this example, the common control cabinet is installed in the UCS shelf of the
first stack.

Stack4
#)Cable channel
Rec. size 110 x 60mm UP/UPR 15
(L80XF/LTUW)
-> Reference point
Stack1
= Basic configuration UP/UPR
UP/UPR 3 (L80XF/LTUW)
(L80XF/LTUW)
450
UP/UPR
MDF- MDF- UP/UPR (L80XF/LTUW)
HX6 HX6 (L80XF/LTUW)
(n) (1) UP/UPR 12
or or UP/UPR 1 (L80XF/LTUW)
MDF- 1305 (L80XF/LTUW)
MDF-
HX8( HX8 UCS
745 (1)
n) (CSPCI) CSPI box
(BP-CS-CPCI)
#
#) #)

Figure 5 CSPCI box in UCS shelf, stack 1

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 77
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Free-Standing Installation

5.5.2 CSPCI Box in External 19" Cabinet

In this example, the common control cabinet is installed in a 19" external cabinet.

#)Cable channel
Rec. size 110 x 60mm
-> Reference point HE = Height unit in 19" SR
19”
450
= Basic configuration
Stack4
Stack1
UP/UPR 15
UP/UPR 4 (L80XF/LTUW)
CSPCI box (L80XF/LTUW)

4HE
450 (BP-CS-CPCI)
UP/UPR
MDF- MDF- UP/UPR (L80XF/LTUW)
HX6 HX6 (L80XF/LTUW)
(n) (1)
or UP/UPR 13
or 1305 UP/UPR (L80XF/LTUW)
MDF- MDF- (L80XF/LTUW)
HX8 HX8
(n) 745 (1) UP/UPR 1
(L80XF/LTUW)
#)
#) #)

Figure 6 CSPCI box in external 19" cabinet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
78 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Free-Standing Installation

5.5.3 HiPath 4000 Free-Standing Installation

(Maximum Configuration)
Figure 7 shows a diagram of a free-standing installation (viewed from above).
This diagram applies to the U.S. with the exception of the MDF cabinets.

The maximum AC-powered system configuration consists of four 4-stack

cabinets and one UACD stack with two power box units.

The maximum DC-powered system configuration consists of four 4-stack

cabinets and two UACD stacks with two power box units each.

2700
MDFHX6 175 MDFHX6
= Basic configu-
1000 ration
[Link] Cable duct
= [Link].
max. 2 Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4 [Link]
SRR 01 800
UACD 4 U... 4 UP... 4 UP.... 4 UP...
SRR = Row of
SR 105 101 102 103 104 cabinets
773 Expansion 1000 SR = Cabinet

Location of: Front

800
ST, printer, server, etc.

1500 ~3870 250

Figure 7 HiPath 4000 free-standing installation

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 79
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Cabling Diagram, I.M.

5.6 Cabling Diagram, I.M.

16
-
9
8
-
1 UP
16 UPR
- 16
9 -
9
-8 -
8
1
UP1 UP
- UPR UPR
16 16
9 -
8 9
- 8
1 -
1
UP UP
16 UPR
- UPR 16
9 -
-8 8
9
1 -
1 UP
MDFHX6 UP
UPR UPR
(1)

MDFHX6
UCS Stack
(6)
(CSPCI) 2, 3, 4

Stack
1

Figure 8 HiPath 4000 cable routing

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
80 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

5.7 Shelf Configuration

This section shows board and power supply locations on the common control and
expansion shelves.

5.7.1 CSPCI Box

The CSPCI box is available in "duplex" and "simplex" configurations.

[Link] Duplex Cabinet

Slot Modules
6 SF2X8
5 DSCXL (CC-B)
4
3 FAN HDCF FAN
2 • DSCXL (CC-A) •
1 DSCXL (ADP) •
PSU (1) PSU (2)
redundant

• -> Basic shelf configuration extended with:

2 x DSCXL: S30810-Q2311-X
SF2X8: S30810-Q2309-X
RTM : S30810-Q2312-X (back)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 81
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

[Link] Simplex Mono Cabinet

Slot Modules
6
5
4
3 FAN HDCF • FAN
2 • •
1 DSCXL (ADP) •
PSU (1) • PSU (2)
redundant

• -> Modules belong to basic shelf configuration:

PSU:ACPCI/DCPCI
Fan:C39165-A7050-B13
DSCXL: S30810-Q2311-X
RTM: S30810-Q2312-X
MCM: S30810-Q2313-X
HDCF: S30810-K2319-X300

5.7.2 UPR Cabinet

IMPORTANT: The unit peripheral redundant (UPR) cabinet is otherwise known

as the LTUW cabinet.

LTUW

#
Peripheral Peripheral modules
modules
PSUP

LTUCA

PSUP

Figure 9 UPR cabinet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
82 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

5.7.3 Unit Peripheral Nonredundant Cabinet

IMPORTANT: The unit peripheral nonredundant (UP) cabinet is otherwise

known as the L80XF cabinet.

L80XF

Peripheral Peripheral
LPC80

modules

LTUCA
modules

PSUP
Figure 10 UP Cabinet

5.7.4 AP 3700-9
Part number: S30805-G5412-X

Component placement (front side)

• Slot 1-5: Peripheral boards

• Slot 6: Common control unit NCUI2 (AP3700-9)

• Slot 7-10: Peripheral boards

• Max. 3 LUNA 2 power supplies

IMPORTANT: Only two power supplies are needed. The third LUNA2 is used for
a redundant power supply.

• CompactPCI cassette (Survivability Server), only used in AP 3700-9 (HiPath

4000)

IMPORTANT: This Compact PCI cassette can be installed in the shelves as an

optional emergency server (Survivability Server).

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 83
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

Slots
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(Survivability Server) - optional

Compact PCI cassette
Max. 3x LUNA 2
(Power Supplies)

Figure 11 AP 3700-9 front view

Component placement (back side) with patch panels

• Slot 10-7: Patch panels (8-, 20- and 24-port RJ45 connectors/CHAMP
connectors)

• Slot 6: Board for power connection (DC above/AC below)

• Slot 5-1: Patch panels (8-, 20- and 24-port RJ45 connectors/CHAMP
connectors)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
84 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

Fan tray

Power supply
module

DSCXL board

HDMO/HDCF board

Fan tray

Figure 12 Survivability Server slide-in shelf

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 85
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

Slots
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure 13 AP 3700-9 (back view) with patch panels

5.7.5 AP 3700-13 (Expansion Cabinet)

Part number: S30805-G5413-X

Component placement (front side)

• Slot 1-6: Peripheral boards

• Slot 7: Central control board LTUCA (AP3700-13)/with (H3800BB) not

occupied

• Slot 8-14: Peripheral boards

• max. 4 LUNA 2 power supplies

IMPORTANT: Only three power supplies are needed. The fourth LUNA2 is used
for a redundant power supply.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
86 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

Slots
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

max. 4x LUNA 2
(Power Supplies)

Figure 14 AP 3700-13 front view

Component placement (back side) with patch panels

• Slot 14-8: Patch panels (8-, 20- and 24-port RJ45 connectors/CHAMP
connectors)

• Slot 7: Board for power connection (DC above/AC below)

• Slot 6-1: Patch panels (8-, 20- and 24-port RJ45 connectors/CHAMP
connectors)

• Ground connector

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 87
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Shelf Configuration

Slots
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure 15 AP 3700-13 (back view) with patch panels

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
88 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 Cabinets

5.7.6 Redundant Power Box Stacks

UACD 2
PDPX2 LPC 1 LPC 2 LPC 3 ACDPX

Stack 3/
4

UACD 1
PDPX2 LPC 1 LPC 2 LPC 3 ACDPX

Stack
1/2

Figure 16 Redundant power box stacks

5.8 Installation with AP 3700 Cabinets

Depending on the system configuration, the following connections are possible
when adding AP 3700 cabinets to a HiPath 4000 system.

5.8.1 Connecting AP 3700-9 to L80XF/LTUW

In this example, an AP 3700 base cabinet with 9 peripheral boards is connected
to a HiPath 4000 V4.0 system.

Using an NCUI4 board, the AP 3700 base cabinet is connected to an STMI4

board on an L80XF or LTUW shelf in a HiPath 4000 system (see Figure 17).

5.8.2 Connecting AP 3700-13 to CSPCI

In this example, an AP 3700 expansion cabinet with 13 peripheral boards is
connected to a HiPath 4000 system. This expansion can only be done with a 19"
cabinet.

The connection is via a cable from the RTM board on the CSPCI shelf to the
LTUCA board in the expansion cabinet (see Figure 17).

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 89
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 Cabinets

AP 3700-9 (9 slots) in 19" cabinet or

as standalone configuration
HiPath 4000
AP 3700-9 N *-G5412-X
S CSAPE
UP/UPR 3 C
(L80XF/
T U x
LTUW)
M I C
I 4 P
LUNA LUNA LUNA C
UP/UPR 2 2 2 2 I
(L80XF/LTUW)

UP/UPR 1
AP 3700-13 (13 slots)
(L80XF/LTUW)
only in 19" cabinet
UCS
CSPCI AP3700-13 L *-G5413-X
T
RTM U
C
A
LUNA LUNA LUNA LUNA
2 2 2 2

Figure 17 AP 3700 connections

5.8.3 AP 3700 Configuration Rules and Examples with

19" Cabinets
The rules apply to the installation of the CSPCI, AP 3700 IP, AP 3700 components
and DCDR in standard commercial 19" cabinets.

[Link] Suitable Cabinet Models

The standard commercial 19" cabinets used for server and network applications
in the IT sector are suitable for installing the HiPath 4000 components.

The elements installed in the cabinet must be accessible from the back and front.

Cabinets that allow 19-inch components to be installed from the back and front
should be used (>= 4 vertical struts).

In accordance with the relevant vendor’s selected rack program, the following
parts and devices must/can be obtained from the rack vendor:

• Fixing screws/material for installing devices/cabinets;

• Sliding rails/support rails;

• Wire feeding elements and cable management;

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
90 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 Cabinets

• Multiple socket busbars/outlets;

• Distribution cabinets/elements and patch panels for LAN connections;

• Fan unit(s) incl. connecting cables;

• Other accessories, for example, additional angles, shelves (ensure air

permeability), C-rails, etc.

In line with the planned configuration, cabinets with the appropriate number of
rack units (Us, 1 U = 44.45 mm) should be selected.

A typical cabinet width of 700 mm ...800 mm and height of at least 600 mm is

recommended. Greater cabinet depths (800 mm ...900 mm) make installation
easier and cable management more convenient and also allow more components
to be installed at the back of the cabinet. The space between the cabinet rows
should typically be the same as the width of the cabinet.

If AP 3700 IP and AP 3700 boards are to be installed, the cabinet must have
sliding rails/supporting rails with a minimum load-bearing capacity of 40 kg.

The sliding rails can be obtained from the rack manufacturer.

The 19" installation brackets supplied should be used to fix the components to the
cabinet struts.

To ensure sufficient heat removal, the cabinets should be arranged in accordance

with the following sample configurations.

CSPCI requires 4 HEs and should preferably be placed in the bottom of the rack.
Enough space should be allowed for ventilation (air drawn in from the left, air
escapes on the right).

The AP 3700-* requires 11 HEs (10 HEs + free space).

Two AP 3700-* boards can be installed without mandatory ventilation (without a

fan unit).

If there are more than two AP 3700-* boards, a 19" fan unit (1 U) must be used.

Ventilation should be provided across the whole area.

The required air flow rate of at least 600 m3/h should be ensured.

If necessary, it is possible to install a second fan unit (if redundancy is desired but
not mandatory).

A minimum clearance of 2 HEs should be allowed between the CSCPI and the
AP 3700-* board

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 91
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 Cabinets

The cabinets should be chosen and configured so that there is sufficient air circu-
lation.

IMPORTANT: As the individual cabinets already satisfy EMC requirements, the

use of shielded racks is not necessary.

19" connector strips in the appropriate country-specific version should be

provided for connection to the AC power supply (230V or 115 V).

Power requirement for CSPCI: 4A/115V 2A/230V

Power requirement for AP 3700 IP: 6A/115V, 3A/230V

Power requirement for AP 3700: 8A/115V, 4A/230V

Power requirement for survivability unit: 4A/115V, 2A/230V

Power requirement for fan unit: see manufacturer’s information

In the case of DC systems (48V), you must ensure that a fused 16 A connection
is used.

Grounding must be performed in a star shape from the external earth bar to the
rack (min. cross-section 102). All ground wires in the rack should be routed to the
to the central ground connection point in the relevant cabinet. The cabinets
should be connected to each other using ground wires. DC power lines must be
shielded for EMC reasons.

The shielding should be removed on both sides.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
92 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 Cabinets

[Link] Sample Configuration AP 3700 or AP3700 IP in a

Cabinet with 25 Rack Units

25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
DCDR DCDR
12
11
10
09
08
07 AP 3700 (1)
AP 3700 (1)
06
05
04
03
02
01

must remain free (1)... Expansion sequence

may be used

Figure 18 Installing AP 3700/AP 3700 IP in a cabinet with 25 rack units

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 93
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 Cabinets

[Link] Sample Configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a Cabinet

with 37 Rack Units

37
36
35
34
33 AP 3700
HiPath (5) (3)
3700
32
AP 3700 (2) HiPath 3700 (2)
31
30
29
28
27
26 Lüfter / Fans
25
24
23
DCDR
22
AP 3700 (4)
21
20
19
18
17
AP 3700 (1) 16
15
14
13 DCDR
12
11
10
09
08
07
06 AP 3700 (3)
05
04
03
CSPCI
02
01

must remain free (1)... Expansion sequence

may be used

Figure 19 Installing CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 37 rack units

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
94 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 Cabinets

[Link] Sample Configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a Cabinet

with 42 Rack Units

41
40
39
AP 3700
HiPath (3)(3)
3700 38 AP 3700
HiPath (6)(3)
3700
37
36
35
34
33
32
Lüfter / Fans 31 Lüfter / Fans
30
29
28
27
AP 3700 (2) 26 AP 3700 (5)
25
24
23
22
21
20
DCDR 19 DCDR
18
17
16
15
14
13
AP 3700 (1) 12 AP 3700 (4)
11
10
09
08
07
Lüfter / Fans redundant 06 Lüfter / Fans redundant
05
04
03
CSPCI
02
01

must remain free (1)... Expansion sequence

may be used

Figure 20 Installing CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 42 rack units

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 95
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
Installation with AP 3700 Cabinets

[Link] Sample Configuration CSPCI with AP 3700 in a Cabinet

with 47 Rack Units

Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2 ... 4

47
46
45
44
43 AP 3700 (7)
AP 3700 (3)
42
41
40
39
38
37 Lüfter / Fans
Lüfter / Fans 36
35
34
33
32
31 AP 3700 (6)
AP 3700 (2) 30
29
28
27
26
25 DCDR
24
DCDR 23
22
21
20
19
18 AP 3700 (5)
17
AP 3700 (1)
16
15
14
13
12
11
Lüfter / Fans redundant 10
09
08
07
06 AP 3700 (4)
05
04
03
CSPCI
02
01

must remain free (1)... max. (15) expansion

may be used sequence
Figure 21 Installing CSPCI with AP 3700 in a cabinet with 47 rack units

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
96 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
MDFHX 6 Mounting Location, I.M.

5.9 MDFHX 6 Mounting Location, I.M.

33 +1
Appro Drill template supplied
x.4 3)

MDFHX 6 MDFHX 6

1100 1) 1305 2)

420 1)

450 2)
4) 1) Mounting dimensions
20
2) Clipping dimensions
3) Distance between MDF HX units
4) Minimum distance from floor

Figure 22 Mounting the MDFHX 6 wall fixture

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 97
5_Aufstellungsvarianten.fm
Installation Variants
MDFHX 8 Mounting Location, I.M.

5.10 MDFHX 8 Mounting Location, I.M.

33 +1
Appro Drill template supplied
x.4 3)

MDFHX 8 MDFHX 8

530 1) 745 2)

420 1)

450 2)
20 4) 1) Mounting dimensions
2) Clipping dimensions
3) Distance between MDFHX units
4) Minimum distance from floor

Figure 23 Mounting the MDFHX 8 wall fixture

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
98 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 6_Erdung.fm
Grounding the HiPath 4000
Grounding the MDF, I.M.

6 Grounding the HiPath 4000

This section describes instructions for grounding the main distribution frame
(MDF) and the system.

IMPORTANT: Implementation regulations based on IEC 60364 and 60950-1

should be observed during installation. Chapter 1, "Connection to the Power
Supply" should also be observed.

6.1 Grounding the MDF, I.M.

NOTE: In undefined main distribution frames (external distributors), you must

connect the ground of the base cabinet (CSPCI) and the main distribution frame
directly to the ground busbar. In this instance, you must not connect a ground
connection directly from the main distribution frame to the base cabinet.

To ground the MDF:

1. Connect the ground connector (green/yellow) from the ground busbar

(building ground) to terminal connection (1) of the first main distribution frame
(see Figure 1).

Ground connect. pt.1 in

MDF

Ground
conductor
2 MDF to base
1 cabinet
Ground conductor from
ground busbar to MDF

Figure 1 HiPath 4000 ground connection

2. If several main distribution frames are installed, connect a second ground

conductor to the terminal connection (2) of the first main distribution frame
(see Figure 1) and connect this line to terminal connection point 2 of the
second main distribution frame.
Repeat this procedure, if necessary, from main distribution frame 2 to 3 and 4.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 99
6_Erdung.fm
Grounding the HiPath 4000
Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets

6.2 Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets

Figure 2 shows the placement of the connecting plate assemblies (straps) for
grounding purposes.

Ground straps - Box

Back straps

Stack 4 Stack 3 Stack 2 Stack 1

Power box

CSPCI

Ground straps for cabinet base

Figure 2 HiPath 4000 grounding straps

IMPORTANT: For the CSPCI box, no extra FPE line (green/yellow) is needed.
Grounding occurs via the 230 Vac or the 0 Vdc.

6.2.1 Grounding the Base Cabinets

To ground the base cabinets:

1. Position the individual stacks and the power box according to the site to avoid
repositioning them later.

2. Using the supplied ground straps (1), determine the correct distance between
the roller bases by inserting the straps in adjacent bases (see Figure 3).

3. Attach the various ground straps to the left (2) and right (3) of the roller base
using the screws that are provided.

1 2 3
Figure 3 Installing the ground strap at the base of the cabinets

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
100 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 6_Erdung.fm
Grounding the HiPath 4000
Connecting and Grounding the Cabinets

6.2.2 Installing the Ground Straps Between Cabinets

7 WARNING
Risk of electric shock as a result of an incorrect grounding conductor
connection
Never operate the system without the specified straps. The strapping serves as
an internal grounding conductor connection for the individual components.

To install the ground straps between cabinets:

1. Removing the four screws shown in (1) of Figure 4.

2. Insert the supplied ground straps (2) and tighten the screws.

3. Depending on the system configuration, attach additional ground straps

between the two stacks and the power (3) and (4).

1 2

3 4

Figure 4 Installing the ground straps between the cabinets

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 101
6_Erdung.fm
Grounding the HiPath 4000
Grounding the System, I.M.

6.3 Grounding the System, I.M.

To ground the system, connect a second ground conductor to the terminal
connection (1) of the main distribution frame (see Figure 1) and connect this to
the ground connection in the roller base (see Figure 5).

Figure 5 HiPath 4000 ground connection

An internal ground conductor between the base cabinet and the expansion
cabinets is supplied ex-works. See Figure 7.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
102 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 6_Erdung.fm
Grounding the HiPath 4000
Grounding the System, U.S.

6.4 Grounding the System, U.S.

To ground the system in the U.S.:

1. Attach one end of the ground wire to the back of the cabinet as shown in
Figure 6.

Figure 6 Grounding the HiPath 4000

2. Attach the other end of the ground wire to the back of the common control
shelf.

3. Attach the remaining grounding wires to the expansion cabinets (see Figure
7).

4. Secure the wires with screws.

IMPORTANT: Further information about power supply and grounding for HiPath
4000 systems operated in the U.S. can be found in the following manual: HiPath
4000 V5 Customer Site Planning and Power Grounding Manual.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 103
6_Erdung.fm
Grounding the HiPath 4000
Grounding the System, U.S.

Figure 7 HiPath 4000 internal ground connection

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
104 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 6_Erdung.fm
Grounding the HiPath 4000
Grounding AP 3700 System Cabinets

6.5 Grounding AP 3700 System Cabinets

To ground the AP 3700 cabinets, see the following alternatives, which depend on
the installation (standalone unit or expansion cabinet; see Figure 8 for grounding
connectors):

• Connect the ground conductor directly from the ground busbar to the
grounding connector.

Or:

• Extend an existing internal ground conductor from a HiPath 4000 system and
attach it to the grounding connector on the AP 3700.

AP 3700-9 AP 3700-13

Grounding connectors
Figure 8 AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13 grounding connectors

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 105
6_Erdung.fm
Grounding the HiPath 4000
System Ground Connections

6.6 System Ground Connections

Network type TN-S (neutral conductor 0V, protective ground connector PE;
functional and protective ground FPE).

L1,2,3 N PE sub-distribution
L1,2,3
N
PE

Distribution
L1,2,3 N PE Plant

MDF
System

FPE*) FPE*)

additional ground busbar

FPE*)
H EB
Main / ground busbar

S =service panel
EB=equipotential bonding *)FPE cross sections in accordance
conductor with national regulations
power e.g. (DIN EN 50310)
company
Net type: TN-S Warning:
IEC 60364-5-54 FPE cables without green/yellow
DIN EN 50310 insulation must be furnished with green/
yellow identifier labels (H59999-J6) at
each end.
Figure 9 HiPath 4000 grounding overview

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
106 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 6_Erdung.fm
Grounding the HiPath 4000
System Ground Connections

Figure 10 and Figure 11 provide a schematic overview of the system ground

connections. These diagrams apply to U.S. with the exception of the connection
to the MDF.

with MDFHX6 2xUACD Stack 1

max. 2304 ports CAB600XW ~~
MDF MDF
HX6 HX6
6) 1) 3) 2)

1)
Battery
FPE cable 352 +
C39195-A7488-B800 (gnye) -

1) Ground strap C39165-A7080-C146

Ground busbar
2) Ground strap C39165-A7080-C22
3) PE cable connected

With non-defined MDF

2xUACD Stack 1
MDF
~~

3) 2)

1)
FPE cable 352
Battery
gnye +
-
Ground busbar 1) Ground strap C39165-A7080-C146
2) Ground strap C39165-A7080-C22
3) PE cable connected
Figure 10 Schematic representation of HiPath 4000 system ground connec-
tions

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 107
6_Erdung.fm
Grounding the HiPath 4000
System Ground Connections

Figure 11 provides an illustration of the system ground connections for HiPath

4000 in the 19-inch configuration.

for 19-inch cabinets 1) FPE cross-section min. 10 mm2, AWG 6

with MDFHX6/8 2) PE line is connected
(max. 2304 ports possible)

MDF MDF
2 x UACD Rack 1 Rack n
HX6 MDF HX6
6) 1) ~~

2)

1) FPE cable (gnye) Battery

-
Ground busbar +

If using a 19-inch UACD configuration, then, in addition to the building ground

connection, a grounding PE is connected to the mains terminal.

Figure 11 Schematic representation of the HiPath 4000 system ground

connections (19-inch cabinets)

Figure 12 shows how the ground connector is connected to the 0-V busbar on the
19-inch cabinet

Figure 12 Ground connection from ground busbar to the 0-V busbar on the 19-
inch cabinet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
108 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Connecting to the Mains

7 Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply

This chapter describes the various mains connection and power supply variants.

7.1 Connecting to the Mains

IMPORTANT: Mains is a term used in Europe to describe a normal commercial

outlet. Mains is going to be used throughout this document to describe the AC
outlet.

IMPORTANT: The HiPath 4000 must be connected to a TN-S network for instal-
lation purposes. An independent electric circuit must be used to protect both
cabinets in the event of mains failure.

TN-S is a type of grounding classification. Each letter indicates as follows:

- T—All exposed conductive metalwork connected directly to ground.
- N—All exposed conductive metalwork connected directly to the grounded
supply conductor
- S—Separate and neutral ground conductors.

7 WARNING
Electric shock due to disconnected ground wire!
The grounding wire of the in-house power connector must always be connected
to the mains power socket first.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 109
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Connecting to the Mains

HiPath 4000 has been designed to accept four different types of power supply
worldwide as follows:

NOTE: The HiPath 2k/3k/4k PSU is sufficiently protected against lightning (up to
2kV) on the 230V connection. For areas at particular risk, it is recommended that
additional lightning protection be provided before the connection line. The
lightning ground bar with the part number C39334-Z7052-C32 offers increased
protection up to 4kV.
The use of a lightning ground bar is mandatory in Brazil.

• Three-phase mains (~230 V/400 V)

• Single-phase mains for max. 2 power supply units

• Single-phase mains with midpoint grounding (~110 V/220 V) or (~120 V/240

V)

• Three-phase mains (~120 V/208 V) or (~127 V/220 V)

There are two connection variants to the mains:

• Connecting to the mains directly by means of a power supply unit (nonre-
dundant power supply) in the individual shelves (LUNA/LPC80).
To connect the HiPath 4000, modem and TAP (technician workstation) to the
mains, a multiple-plug connector must be supplied by the customer. This
multiple-plug connector must be installed so that the system power cable
supplied is sufficient (length = 3 m [10 ft]).

7 WARNING
Safety cannot be guaranteed if the mains plugs are inaccessible.
The mains plug must be easily and safely accessible in all installation variants.
Unplug the mains plug immediately in the event of danger!

• Connecting to the mains by means of a power box (redundant power supply)

7 WARNING
Electric shock due to disconnected ground wire!
Before starting up the system and connecting the stations, connect the system
correctly to the ground wire.
Never operate the system without the required ground wire.

IMPORTANT: You can choose which variant is applicable to your installation.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
110 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Connecting to the Mains

7.1.1 Connecting to the Mains with LUNA/LPC80

Power Supply Units
In the nonredundant power supply variant, the mains connection is made directly
to the various power supply units by means of a connector strip (the connector
strips are located in the base of each stack). Depending on the local power supply
(in-house connection), you must observe the connection criteria in Figure 1.

IMPORTANT: In Canada and U.S., only L1, L2, and PE are brought to the wall
socket. The neutral lead for 208 Vac power is not brought to the wall socket.

This part of the illustration applies to

1-phase network Canada and U.S.
with mid-point L1
grounding L2 3-phase network
A
~ 110 V/220 V B
L3 ~ 120 V/208 V
N ~ 127 V/220 V
~ 120 V/240 V N (PE) PE

Fuse Fuse
16 A 16 A

L1
L2 3-phase network
L3
~ 230 V/400 V
N
PE
Fuse
16 A
PE N L1
This part of the illustration (L3)
applies to Europe and GNYE BU BK1
gnye bu bk
International character code for
I.M.
colors
Cable 3x1.52

1 multiple socket outlet

with up to 5 sockets

LPC80/LUNA

Figure 1 Mains connection LPC80/LUNA

The power cables should already be installed in new systems. Should the AC-to-
DC shelf power supply cables become unplugged during transit, route the power
cable in a HiPath 4000 as follows:

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 111
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Connecting to the Mains

1. Ensure that the system is off.

2. Plug the power cable into the AC-to-DC shelf power shelf supplies ( LPC80).

3. Route the power cable through the metal knock-out (see Figure 2) and to the
back of the system.

4. Secure the power cable with a tie-wrap on the metal knock-out.

NOTE: Two cable ties are required for proper EMI grounding.

5. Route and plug the other end of the power cable to the mains socket (AC
outlet) in the base unit (BAU) under the shelf (see Figure 3).

6. Repeat this procedure to the L80XF (expansion) cabinets if you have a multi-
cabinet installation.

Figure 2 Routing the power cable

Figure 3 Connecting HiPath 4000 to the mains, I.M.

IMPORTANT: Figure 3 shows an illustration for the I.M. Canada and U.S. use a
different outlet strip.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
112 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Connecting to the Mains

7.1.2 Connecting to the Mains Using the Power Box

IMPORTANT: In North America, connection is made to the mains using a power

cable with a plug. This power cable is connected to the mains socket at the
factory. The mains socket is mounted in the UACD and the strain-relieved
connection cable is fed out of the power box.

In the case of the redundant power supply variant, the connection is made to the
mains using a power connector socket on the power box. Depending on the local
power supply, you may need to make a distinction between the different
connection variants.

To connect to the mains by means of the power box:

1. Remove the shielded power line with connection box from the power box
(Powershelf 1 or Powershelf 2) and remove the cover of the mains socket.

2. Plug the power cord to the mains socket.

IMPORTANT: The shielded power lines of the powershelves no longer need to

be attached to the frame using a grounding bracket.

Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4

UPR.. 3 UPR.. 7 UPR.. 11 UPR.. 15

Power
box UPR.. 2 UPR.. 6 UPR.. 10 UPR.. 14

UACD 2 UPR.. 1 UPR.. 5 UPR.. 9 UPR.. 13

UACD 1 UCS UPR.. 4 UPR.. 8 UPR.. 12

Powershelf 1 Powershelf 2
Figure 4 Connecting to the mains using the power box

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 113
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Installing a Three-Phase Network

7.2 Installing a Three-Phase Network

7 WARNING
Electric shock due to disconnected ground wire!
Before you connect the three-phase power cable (~230 V/400 V), ensure that the
protective ground terminal (building ground) is connected to the system frame.

To install a three-phase connection:

1. Remove the cover to the junction box.

2. Unscrew the coupling on the junction box.

3. Insert the open end of the power cable through the junction box.

4. Strip the wires on the power cable, insert, and secure the wires to the
terminals as follows: (see Figure 5 and Figure 6):

a) Attach the green/yellow wire to the (GNYE) terminal.

b) Attach the blue wire to the (BU) terminal.

c) Attach the brown wire to the (BN) terminal.

d) Attach each of the two black wires that emerge from the mains cable to a
separate (BK) terminal on the distribution socket.

e) Depending on the system configuration, repeat the same procedure

sequence for the second power socket.

5. Tighten the screw on the junction box and replace the cover.

The colored wires are as follows.

Green/yellow = grounding wire PE

(GNYE)
Blue = neutral N (BU)
Brown = phase 1 L1 (BN)
Black = phase 2 L2 (BK)
Black = phase 3 L3 (BK)

Figure 5 UACD junction box

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
114 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Installing a Single-Phase Network

In-house network socket

Power box bk BK(L3)

bk BK(L2)

bn BN(L1)

bu BU(N)

gnye GNYE(PE)

Figure 6 Wiring the UACD junction box

7.3 Installing a Single-Phase Network

With this type of connection, you need to make a few wiring changes in the
junction box and UACD power supply frame before you can make the connection
to the in-house network.

7 WARNING
Electric shock due to disconnected ground wire!
Before you connect the single-phase power, ensure that the protective ground
terminal (building ground) is connected to the system frame.

To install a single-phase connection to a maximum UACD configuration:

1. Remove the cover to the junction box.

2. Unscrew the coupling on the junction box.

3. Insert the open end of the power cable through the junction box.

4. Strip the wires on the power cable, insert, and secure the wires to the
terminals as follows:

a) In the junction box, bridge the BN(L1) port with BK1(L2).

b) Connect the power switches 1, 2 and 3 to the ACDPX in the power supply
frame of the UACD, as shown in the Figure 7.

5. Replace the cover of the junction box.

6. Route the power cable to the mains.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 115
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Overview of Mains Connection 1

7.4 Overview of Mains Connection 1

3-phase network ~ 230V/400V Single-phase network ~ 230V

L1 for max. of 2 power supplies
L2
L3 L1
N N
PE PE
16 A fuse

Cable 5x2.52 Cable 3x2.52

*)
PE cable
PE N L1 L2 L3 must be PE N L1 L3
L2
GNYE BU BK2
connected GNYE BU BK2
gnye bu BN BK1bk2 gnye bu BN BK1 bk2
Cable with bn bk1 International color cable bn bk1
terminal box codes
C39195-A7970-B19

ACDPX
PSU CB
1 /2 /3 1
11 21
UACD
2
11 21

3
11 21
L1 2 3 N PE
*) Insert additional jumper

Figure 7 Three-phase/single-phase connection for two power supply units

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
116 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Installing a Three-Phase or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-Point Grounding, I.M.

7.5 Installing a Three-Phase or Single-Phase Connection with Mid-Point

Grounding, I.M.
With this type of connection, you need to make a few wiring changes in the
junction box and also in the power supply frame before you can make the
connection to the in-house network.

7 WARNING
Electric shock due to disconnected ground wire!
Before you connect the power phases, make sure that the protective ground
terminal (building ground) is connected to the system frame.

To install a three-phase or single-phase connection with mid-point grounding:

1. Remove the cover to the junction box.

2. Unscrew the coupling on the junction box.

3. Insert the open end of the power cable through the junction box.

4. Strip the wires on the power cable, insert, and secure the wires to the
terminals as follows:

a) Insert and secure the blue (BU) and brown (BN) wires together in the
junction box.

b) Insert and secure both black (BK) lines together.

c) Connect the power switches 1, 2 and 3 to the ACDPX in the power supply
frame UACD, as shown in the Figure 8.

5. Replace the cover of the junction box.

6. Route the power cable to the mains.

7 WARNING
Electric shock due to the connection of unapproved systems!
Only one HiPath 4000 DC system with a 25A fuse may be connected per stack
to the UACD.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 117
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Overview of Mains Connection 2, I.M.

7.6 Overview of Mains Connection 2, I.M.

L1 Single-phase
3-phase network L2 network A
~ 120 V/208 V L3 midpoint grounding B
~ 127 V/220 V N ~ 110/220 V N(PE)
PE ~ 120/240 V

Fuse
25 A

Cable 3x42

PE cable must
be connected

*) Reconnect
N L3 L1 N
(PE) (n) (PE) B A

GNYE BU BK2 GNYE BU BK2

Cable with gnye bu BN BK1 bk2 gnye bu BN BK1 bk2
terminal box bn bk1 bn bk1
C39195-A7970-B19 International cable color
codes

ACDPX
PSU CB
1 /2 /3 1
11 21
UACD
2
11 21
3
11 21
L1 N
PE
*) For information on reconnecting, see also diagram:
a) mains socket: V32905-A2-X399
b) ACDP/ACDPX: V32905-A2-X206!

Figure 8 Three-phase/single-phase connection with midpoint grounding

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
118 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Power Supply

7.7 Power Supply

In HiPath 4000, each cabinet is supplied with integrated AC/DC power supplies
(LPC80). An external power box is connected to the HiPath 4000 to support
power distribution to the cabinets.

IMPORTANT: A power box connection is supported for battery management in

HiPath 4000 and later. For North America (NA) this connection is not supported.

NOTE: The contact area of all power supply cables must be bonded with two
cable fasteners each (see Figure 52 on page 162).

The DC power supply usually has a voltage of –48 V. However, some modules
require –60 V. A power supply module (APPS) is used in this case. This -60-V
power supply is only provided for individual shelves.

NOTE: Never plug in or unplug the APPS module when the power is on.

7.8 AC Connection to Power Supplies

In systems with nonredundant power supply, the CSPCI shelf contains an ACPCI
power supply unit (2 ACPCIs in duplex mode) and each expansion cabinet
(L80XF) contains an LPC80 power supply unit. Each of these power supply units
is separately fed with ~230V. This power supply unit has an input voltage range
of ~176 V to ~253 V (45 Hz - 66 Hz) without supplementary settings. A –48V
output voltage is generated and this in turn is transformed into several lower
voltages by a second power supply unit. (PSUP).

7.8.1 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered,

Nonredundant HiPath 4000
To route the power cables in an ac-powered, nonredundant HiPath 4000 (see
also Figure 11 and Figure 12):

1. Ensure that the system is off.

2. If your system features redundant CPUs: Connect the power cables to the
AC/AC power management unit (LPC80).

3. Route the power cables (1) downwards through the frame’s metal knock-out
(2) (see Figure 9) to the base unit assembly (BUA) under the CSPCI shelf.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 119
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC Connection to Power Supplies

4. Secure the power cables with tie-wraps on the metal knock-outs (3).

5. Plug the other end of the power cables to the ac outlet in the BUA.

6. Follow steps 2 through 9 on page 7-126 in Chapter 7, "Routing the Power

Cables on an AC-Powered, Redundant HiPath 4000".

2 1

3
Figure 9 HiPath 4000 AC installation

7.8.2 Attaching the Power Cable to the CSPCI Box

If the power cable has not already been attached at the factory, proceed as
follows:

1. Remove the fixing screws (1) from the MCM board on the back of the CSPCI
box and remove the board (see also Figure 10).

2. Insert the power cable in the socket (2) on the CSPCI box and secure it to the
cord grip (3) with a cable tie.

3. Route the power cable through the cable duct (4) on the MCM board and
screw the MCM board back onto the CSPCI shelf.

2
1 3

4
Figure 10 Attaching the power cable to the CSPCI box

Figure 11 shows a diagram of the AC connection with an L80XF cabinet.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
120 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC Connection to Power Supplies

Stack 1 Stack 4
UP UP
LPC L80XF LPC L80XF
80 BAT PS 80 BAT PS
# = S30805-H5284- UP UP
* = S30805-H5298- Talk Talk
Bulk Bulk
$ = C39195-A .... UP
~ LPC
UP ~ LPC L80XF
80 BAT PS 80 BAT PS
UP FPE UP
Talk Talk
Bulk $ -A7650-B35 Bulk
UP UP
~ LPC L80XF PS ~ LPC L80XF PS
80 BAT 80 BAT
UP UP
Talk Talk
Bulk Bulk
CSPCI box UCS
UP UP
~ LPC L80XF
1) ~ CSPCI box 80 BAT PS
equipotential UP
Talk
MCM bonding Bulk
#-X12 FPE/PE #-X12 FPE
230/115V ~
~ AC AC
2) 3) -48V 3) -48V
MDF MDF
FPE

MDF-
HX6/8

No. Part number Bez. / design Bemerkung / remark

No. code no. von / from --> nach / to
1) C39195-A7985-B1 AC connection CSPCI, MCM, AC --> MCM, Mate-N-Lok, DC
2) C39195-Z7001-C17 power cable for "IM" CSPCI, MCM, AC --> power or UPS
C39195-Z7000-C92 " for "NA"
3) C39334-Z7052-C22 power strip for "IM" Stack 1...4
S30807-H6586-X NAPSK for "NA"
Figure 11 AC connection with UP/L80XF cabinet (nonredundant)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 121
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC Connection to Power Supplies

Stack 1 *-X11
Stack 4
*-X11
UP UP
LPC L80XF LPC L80XF
PS PS
80 BAT UP 80 BAT UP
# = S30805-H5284- Talk Talk
Bulk Bulk
* = S30805-H5298-
$ = C39195-A .... ~
UP ~ UP
LPC L80XF PS FPE LPC L80XF PS
80 BAT UP 80 BAT UP
Talk $ -A7650-B35 Talk
Bulk Bulk
UP UP
~ LPC PS
~ LPC L80XF
L80XF PS
80 BAT UP 80 BAT
UP
Talk Talk
Bulk Bulk
CSPCI box UCS UP
~ LPC L80XF
~ *-X14 80 BAT PS
UP
MCM 1) CSPCI box Talk
Bulk
equipotential
bonding #-X12 FPE/PE #-X12 FPE
+/-48V ~
AC AC
5) -48V 5)
-48V
FPE MDF MDF
2) 3)
MDF- 4)
HX6/8 UACD

l 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 l A
C
P Bulk Talk Talk Bulk P D
C PDPX2(1) PDPX2(2) C P AC4
X
BAMX1 BAMX2 EBCCB(2) to battery
EBCCB(1)

No. Part number Bez. / design Bemerkung / remark

No. code no. von / from --> nach / to
1) S30805-H5298-X14 DC connection Stack 1, UCS
C39195-A7944-B38 DC cable Stack 1, UCS --> CSPCI box, MCM, Mate-N-
Lok
2) C39195-A7944-B16 Cable UACD, DC connection --> Stack 1-2
3) C39195-A7944-B17 Cable UACD, DC connection --> Stack 3-4
4) C39195-Z7904-A25 ALIN CSPCI box, MCM, ALIN --> UACD, BAMX1
5) C39334-Z7052-C22 power strip for "IM" Stack 1...4
S30807-H6586-X NAPSK for "NA"
Figure 12 AC connection with UP/L80XF cabinet + battery backup (nonre-
dundant)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
122 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Setting the Operating Mode for the LPC80, I.M.

7.9 Setting the Operating Mode for the LPC80, I.M.

Two power supply units (PSU) from two different manufacturers can be used for
LPC80. A switch located at the back of the PSU allows you to set the operating
mode of the PSU to Power Supply or Battery Charger, depending on the
particular application. The operating modes are:

ON = Battery charger
OFF = Power Supply

IMPORTANT: The battery charger feature is not used in Canada or U.S.

Figure 13 shows the switch of the two different power supply units. Set the
operating mode of the power supply unit using this switch.

Figure 13 LPC80 settings

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 123
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Setting the Operating Mode for the LPC80, I.M.

7.9.1 Setting the Operating Mode

Table 1 lists the operating modes of the LPC80.

Between standard/ for -K7162- Artesyn: neutral switch, clearly identifiable from
charger mode (on the sticker
back of the LPC80) 1st option: Battery Charger
2nd option: Power Supply Peripheral Shelf:
standard mode forebodes
for -K7163- Celestica: jumper W1, clearly identifiable from
sticker
ON --> connector W1 with J5 --> battery charger
mode
OFF --> connector W1 with
J6 --> standard mode for CAB80DSC
for K7554- Supplier: MagneTek 3-pin connector behind a
window on the underside of the power supply
unit. (2 screws)
1. Connector in "Mode1": as used with peripheral
shelves
2. Connector in "Mode2": as used with battery
chargers
Between two possible for -K7162- Artesyn: jumper setting, clearly identifiable from
voltages (in charger sticker
mode) 1st option: 54.7 V (factory setting)
2nd option: 53.5 V
for -K7163- Celestica: jumper J9, clearly identifiable from
sticker
1st option: connection between pin 3 and pin 4
from J9 --> 54.7V (factory setting)
2nd option: connection between pin 3 and pin 4
from J9 --> 53.5V
for K7554- Supplier: MagneTek Switch on the underside of
the power supply unit; (voltages shown on circuit
board)
- Switch in left position --> 53.5V
- Switch in right position --> 54.7V
Table 1 Operating mode settings of the LPC80

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
124 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

7.10 DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

IMPORTANT: In Canada and U.S., the UPS provides AC power only. It is not a
source of DC power.

An external system power supply (uninterruptible power supply [UPS] in the U.S.)
is a PSU in which a jumper is connected to the system instead of the LPC80
power supply unit (see Figure 18). The jumper feeds the –48 V external power
supply to the system. The external –48V is connected from the DC power box to
the individual backplanes of the system cabinets.

The connection of an external battery is identical to the connection of an external

power supply unit.

7.10.1 Routing the Power Cables on an AC-Powered,

Redundant HiPath 4000
The bulk and talk circuit breaker cables connect to the UACD or UDCD at one
end. At the HiPath 4000, you need to connect the bulk and talk circuit breaker
cables as follows (see Figure 20):

1. Ensure that the system is off.

2. At the back of the CSPCI frame:

Connect the BULK circuit breaker cable to the DC connector on the CSPCI
box (see Figure 15) and then create a daisy-chain connection to the X12
connectors on the expansion cabinets.

NOTE: Ensure that the cables are locked down, otherwise, the LTU shelf that
is connected to is not going to function properly.

IMPORTANT: The top blue connector bulk cable on top of the CSPCI box
connects to the bottom blue connector of the LTUW cabinet. The top blue
connector bulk cable on the LTUW cabinet connects to the bottom blue
connector of the LTUW cabinet immediately above it and so on.

3. At every cabinet:
Connect and tie-wrap the shielded portion of the –48 Vdc bulk input power
cables to the cabinet frame.

4. At every cabinet:
Connect the -48-Vdc bulk input power cable to the shielded ground at the left
side of each cabinet.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 125
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

5. For systems with redundant power supply:

Route the other two –48 Vdc bulk cables over to the left side of the CSPCI
frame and tie-wrap the shielded portion of the cable to the shielded ground.

6. Connect the -48-Vdc input talk circuit breaker cables to the X11 connector of
the LTUW shelf.

7. Daisy-chain the -48-Vdc input talk circuit breaker cables to the upper LTUW
shelves.

8. At every cabinet:
Connect the -48-Vdc talk input power cable to the shielded ground at the left
side of each cabinet.

9. At the back of the CSPCI frame:

Route the bottom blue connector -48-Vdc bulk cable (input) to the -48-Vdc
connector at the back of the output distribution panel of the UACD or UDCD.
In the UACD, this cable is called the ALUM cable, and it plugs to the TBD
connector.
In the UDCD, this cable is called the power fail cable, and it plugs to the
DCPFX1-E3 connector.

Output to
LTUW
shelf

Input from Tie-

UACD or wraps
UDCD

Shielded
ground

Figure 14 Connecting the bulk power

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
126 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

7.10.2 Routing the Power Cables from the UACD and

UDCD to the HiPath 4000

NOTE: Ensure that the power is off.

All internal cabling for the UACD and UDCD should be complete when the
equipment goes out of the factory. The output power cables on the UACD and
UDCD are also already connected on the power shelves.

In the UACD or UDCD, the output power cable must be connected to the CSPCI
connector (bottom blue connector of the bulk circuit breaker, see Figure 14).

7.10.3 Attaching a DC Cable to the CSPCI Box

If the DC cable has not already been attached at the factory, proceed as follows:

1. Connect the -48V cable from the external battery to the DC terminal (1) on the
base cabinet (see Figure 15).

2. Route the -48V from the -48V fuse module to the CSPCI backplane (2).

Expansion cabinet

-
Base cabinet

(2) CSPCI box

Backplane
1
- 48V

Figure 15 Connecting the external –48V to the DC terminal on the base cabinet

3. Remove the fixing screws (3) from the MCM board on the back of the CSPCI
box and remove the board (see also Figure 17).

IMPORTANT: The factory setting for the CSPCI shelf’s power supply coding is
always set to ACPCI. To use DC power supplies (DCPCI), you must change the
coding as indicated in Figure 16.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 127
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

Front
"Duplex" configuration

Mod: SF2X8
Mod: DSCXL
F F
A HDCF A
N N

Mod: DSCXL
Mod: DSCXL
PSU.. (1) PSU.. (2)
1) 1)

1) Coding of power supplies:

- AC system 1)

Chamber F: empty
Chamber E: empty
Chamber D: Position 1
- DC system 1)

Chamber F: empty
Chamber E: empty
Chamber D: Position 3

Figure 16 Coding for power supply configurations ACPCI/DCPCI

4. Insert the DC cable in the socket (4) on the CSPCI box and secure the cable
shield to the cord grip (5) with a cable tie.

5. Route the DC cable out through the cable duct (6) on the MCM board and
screw the MCM board back onto the CSPCI shelf.

4
3 5

6
Figure 17 Attaching a DC cable to the CSPCI box

6. Once the -48V cable is connected, check that the correct jumper is plugged
into the designated plug connector for the LPC80 (see Figure 18).

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
128 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with the External Power Supply, I.M.

Figure 18 HiPath 4000 jumper

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 129
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with UP/L80XF Cabinet, I.M.

7.11 DC Connection with UP/L80XF Cabinet, I.M.

Stack 1 Stack 4
*- *- UP
UP
L80XF L80XF
# = S30805-H5284- PS PS
BAT UP BAT UP
* = S30805-H5298- Talk Talk
Bulk Bulk
$ = C39195-A ....
UP UP
with L80XF FPE L80XF PS
PS
jumpers BAT
Talk
UP $ -A7650-B35 BAT
Talk
UP
Bulk Bulk
UP
UP UP
L80XF
PS
with L80XF PS
BAT UP jumpers BAT UP
Talk Talk
Bulk Bulk
CSPCI box UCS UP

1) *-X14 BAT
L80XF PS
UP
CSPCI box
MCM equipotential
Talk
Bulk
bonding
FPE/PE FPE/PE
+/-48V #-X12 #-X12
2) 2)
-48V -48V
MDF DC MDF DC
connection connection
FPE -48V
-48V
MDFHX
6/8

No. Part number Bez. / design Bemerkung / remark

No. code no. von / from --> nach / to
1) S30805-H5298-X DC connection Stack 1, UCS
C39195-A7944-B38 DC cable UCS --> CSPCI box, MCM, Mate-N-Lok
2) C39195-A7944-B33 Cable UCS DC connection --> -48V connection
Figure 19 DC connection with UP/L80XF cabinet, nonredundant (IM Version)

IMPORTANT: In Canada and U.S., a DC input configuration is not available.

7.12 AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet

In systems with redundant power supply, there are two PSUP power supplies per
LTUW. A –48 V output is provided to each power supply from a separate power
box using the backplane, that is, the ~230 Vac is directly connected to the power
box and not to the system.

An AC-powered HiPath 4000 supports one stack of two UACD cabinets.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
130 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with a Redundant LTUW Cabinet

An external battery connection can also be used to support the power supply.

IMPORTANT: In North America, an external battery is not supported.

Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X12 *-X11 *-X12 *-X11
UPR UPR
PS LTUW PS PS LTUW PS
UP UP UP UP
Talk Talk
# = S30805-H5284- Bulk Bulk
* = S30805-H5298-
UPR UPR
$ = C39195-A .... LTUW PS LTUW PS
PS FPE PS UP
UP UP UP
Talk $ -A7650-B35 Talk
Bulk Bulk
UPR UPR
PS LTUW PS PS LTUW PS
UP UP
UP Talk UP Talk
Bulk Bulk
*-X15
CSPCI box UCS UPR
*-X14 LTUW PS
*-X15 PS UP
Talk
MCM 1) CSPCI box UP
Bulk

FPE/PE FPE/PE
+/-48V
-48V 3) -48V
-48V
MDF MDF
FPE UACD (2)
-48V 1 2 1 2
Bulk Talk
l
P
l
P
A
C
D
PDPX2 C C P AC4
X
MDFHX 2) BAMX2 EBCCB to battery
6/8
UACD (1)
4) 1 2 1 2 l l A
C
Bulk Talk P P D
PDPX2 C C P AC4
X
BAMX1 EBCCB to battery

No. Part number Bez. / design Bemerkung / remark

No. code no. von / from --> nach / to
1) S30805-H5298-X14 DC connection Stack 1, UCS
C39195-A7944-B38 DC cable Stack 1, UCS --> CSPCI box, MCM, Mate-N-Lok
2) C39195-A7944-B16 Cable UACD, DC connection --> Stack 1-2
3) C39195-A7944-B17 Cable UACD, DC connection --> Stack 3-4
4) C39195-Z7904-A25 ALIN CSPCI box, MCM, ALIN --> UACD, BAMX1
Figure 20 AC/DC connection with redundant UPR/LTUW shelves + UACD (IM
version)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 131
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box, I.M.

7.13 DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box, I.M.

Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X12 *-X11 *-X12 *-X11
UPR UPR
LTUW PS PS LTUW PS
PS UP
# = S30805-H5284- UP Talk UP Talk UP
Bulk Bulk
* = S30805-H5298-
$ = C39195-A .... UPR UPR
LTUW PS LTUW PS
PS FPE PS UP
UP UP UP
Talk Talk
Bulk $ -A7650-B35 Bulk

UPR UPR
LTUW PS PS LTUW PS
PS UP UP
UP
1) UP
Bulk
Talk
Bulk
Talk
*-X15
CSPCI box UCS UPR
*-X14 LTUW PS
*-X15 PS UP
MCM CSPCI box UP
Bulk
Talk

2)
FPE/PE FPE/PE
+/-48V

DC connection -48V 2) -48V

-48V MDF DC connection MDF
FPE -48V

MDFHX
6/8

No. Part number Bez. / design Bemerkung / remark

No. code no. von / from --> nach / to
1) S30805-H5298-X14 DC connection Stack 1, UCS
C39195-A7944-B38 DC cable Stack 1, UCS --> CSPCI box, MCM, Mate-N-Lok
2) C39195-A7944-B33 Cable UCS, DC connection --> -48V connection
Figure 21 DC connection with redundant UPR/LTUW shelves, I.M.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
132 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box, I.M.

7.13.1 Connecting the Battery to the Power Box, I.M.

To connect an external battery to the HiPath 4000:

1. Connect the 0 V supply from the battery to the roller base of the power box
(see Figure 22).

The arrows indicate

the points where a 0 V
battery connection is
made to the power
box.

Figure 22 0 V battery connection

2. Attach the –48 V supply from the external battery to the cable drawn from the
system (see Figure 23).

EBCCB 1
PSU
(EBCCB 2)

ON
LPC
OFF BAMX 1
X6 (X7)
-48 V sense
PDPX2(1)
(PDPX2(2))
POWER
SHARE
Fuse
70 A
ON
OFF

BAMX 1
(BAMX 2)
UBATT

Ext. batt. Items in parentheses indicate

-48 V double configuration in the
power box.
Figure 23 External battery connection to power box (back view)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 133
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box, I.M.

7.13.2 Connecting the MDF for a Nonredundant,

System, I.M.

IMPORTANT: In Canada and U.S., the UPS provides AC power only. It is not a
source of DC power.

The power supply for the main distribution frame is branched from extension
boxes 1 and 2 and connected to the main distribution frame by means of fuse
modules (Si1/Si2), each with 1.6 A fuses (see Figure 24 and Figure 25). The –48
V connectors from the MDFs can be combined as required. Ensure that the
number of MDFs connected at a fuse does not exceed the overall power
requirement for each 1.6 A fuse.

MDFHX6 MDFHX6
4/5/6 1/2/3
Backplane L80XF

-48 V -48 V
-48 V Exp. 1 Exp. 2
-48 V

Si1 Si2 2.0 A each

Figure 24 Example of a –48 V connection for main distribution frame (nonre-

dundant)

The arrows indicate the -48 V

cables and fuse module (Si1,
Si2). The cable from Si1 is
connected to MDF 1/2/3. The
cable from Si2 is connected to
MDF 4/5/6.

Fuses:

L80XF = 2.0 A
LTUW (X15) = 1.6 A
Figure 25 -48 V fuse module for MDF (nonredundant)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
134 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
DC Connection with Redundant UPR/LTUW Box, I.M.

The arrows indicate the

connection for -48 V on the
main distribution frame. The -
48 V cables from the various
fuses must be connected here.

If necessary, this connection

can also be connected to other
main distribution frames (up to
a maximum power
consumption of 1.6 A per fuse).

Figure 26 -48 V main distribution frame connection

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 135
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

7.14 AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

The following shows the AC and DC connections for the AP 3700 (base and
expansion cabinet).

7.14.1 AC Connection AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13

Figure 27 shows the power inputs for the AP 3700-9 and AP 3700-13.

AP 3700-9 AC connections AP 3700-13

Figure 27 AC connections AP 3700-9/AP1100 3700-13

7.14.2 DC Connection AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13

Figure 28 shows the DC inputs for the AP 3700-9 and AP 3700-13.

AP 3700-9 DC connections AP 3700-13

Figure 28 DC connections AP 3700-9/AP 3700-13

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
136 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

7.14.3 AC Connection AP 3700 in 19" Cabinet

19" rack 2...4 Racks from behind 19" rack 1

AP 3700 AP 3700

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 2) 2) NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2

FAN FAN
6)
AP 3700 AP 3700

6)
LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
2)
2)

AP 3700 AP 3700 6)
6)
LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
2)
FAN 2) FAN
AP 3700 6)
6) *) CSPCI
LU LU LU LU RTM
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 MCM
2)

6) *) *)
2)
(F)PE
AC AC
1) 1)
*) Set up a secure star-shaped earth connection from the earth bar to
the cabinet. Secure cable with cable ties.
Figure 29 AC connection AP 3700 in 19" cabinet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 137
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

7.14.4 DC Connection AP 3700 with DCDR (Fuse Unit)

19" rack 2...4 19" rack 1

Racks from behind
AP 3700 AP 3700

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
7)
FAN module FAN module
AP 3700 6) AP 3700
6)
LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
7) 8)
(-)
DCDR (-) (-)
DCDR (-)

AP 3700 AP 3700
6)
6)
LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
7)
FAN module FAN module
AP 3700 6)
7) CSPCI
8)
LU LU LU LU RTM
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 6)
MCM
8)
6) (F)PE
10) *) (F)PE *)
DC + / - 48V DC + / - 48V
Connection
*) Set up a secure star-shaped with or without L bridges
earth connection from the earth PE L2+ L1+ L2- L1- PE L2+ L1+ L2- L1-
10)
bar to the cabinet. Secure cable
4a) 4)or5) 4a) 4)or5)
with cable ties.
Figure 30 DC Connection AP 3700 with DCDR (Fuse Unit)

Table 2 lists the cables to be used when the AP 3700 is to have AC/DC wiring in
the 19" cabinet (see the numbers in Figure 29 and Figure 30).

No Part number Name From To Remark

.
1) from the rack AC multiple 19-inch rack, AC Housing instal-
vendor socket multiple lation
outlet socket outlet

Table 2 Cables for AP3700 AC/DC connection in the 19" cabinet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
138 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

No Part number Name From To Remark

.
2) C39195- Power cable CSPCI / AC multiple socket f. IM
Z7001-C17 AP 3700 outlet 230V
or
C39195- f. NA
Z7001-C19
3) S30805- DC 19" rack, CSPCI / Interim
H5298-X10 connection 2x Si 1+2 AP 3700 sol-
with line ution
2x C39195-
A7944-B57
4) C39195- Cable UACD (1), (2) Rack 1 ... 4,
A7944-B16/17 -48 V, Bulk/Talk -> DC connection -
-48 V, Bulk/Talk -> X10 or
terminal block
(see no.10)
4a) C39195- Cable 0 V UACD earth bar Terminal block,
A7556-B540 see no.10
5) C39195- Cable DC -48-V feed Rack 1 ... 4 DC Interim
A7954-B33 connection. -X10 sol-
ution
6) C39195- Cable 10 mm2 AP 3700 - Central ground (F)PE
A7650-B250 grounding point in the rack
connector
7) C39195- Cable +/- 48 V 19" rack, DCDR CSPCI / Series
A7944-B56 Si F01/F02/F32 AP 3700
and F31
8) from the Cable 19" rack, DCDR Terminal block in included
DCDR vendor 2 x +/-48 V 19-inch rack,
S30122-
X8019-X4
9) C39195- Cable Rack, central External earth bar
A7488-B800 ground point
10) S30122- Terminal Installed in 19" include-
X8018-X2 block rack ed
Table 2 Cables for AP3700 AC/DC connection in the 19" cabinet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 139
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

7.14.5 DC Connection AP 3700 with DCDR (DC Kit for

19-Inch Cabinet)
This chapter once again describes DC connection to the DCDR fuse unit if the
delivery includes a “DC kit” for 19-inch cabinet installation in the AP 3700
cabinets.

19" rack 2...4 Racks from behind 19" rack 1

AP 3700 AP 3700

LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
2) 2)
FAN module FAN module
AP 3700 3) AP 3700

3)
LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
2) 1)
(-)
DCDR (-) (-)
DCDR (-)

1) AP 3700 AP 3700
1)
3)
3)
LU LU LU LU LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2
2)
FAN module FAN module
AP 3700 3)
2) CSPCI
1)
LU LU LU LU RTM
NA2 NA2 NA2 NA2 3)
MCM

3)
1) (F)PE 1) (F)PE
DC + / - 48V *) / 6)
DC + / - 48V *) / 6)
*) Set up a secure star-shaped earth Connection with or without L
connection from the earth bar to the bridges
central ground connect point on the PE L2+ L1+ L2- L1-
rack (min. cross-section 102)
4) + 5) PE L2+ L1+ L2- L1-
Cable from UACD
+ " -earth bar 1)
-48 V " - bulk/talk
Figure 31 DC connection AP 3700 with DCDR (DC kit for 19-inch cabinet)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
140 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

7.14.6 DCDR Connection from Behind

DCDR from behind

X32 X30 X04 X02
(-) X31 X29 X03 X01 (-)
1)
(+) (+)
1)

2) 1A Si/CB
2)
16 A Si/CB for MDF 16 A Si/CB
L2- L2+ for 3rd + 4th for 1st + 2nd L1+ L1-
Terminal cabinet cabinet Terminal
block block

Figure 32 DCDR connection from behind

Table 3 lists the cables to be used for DC wiring in the AP 3700 in the 19-inch
cabinet (see numbering in Figure 31 and Figure 32).

No Part number Name From To Remar

. k

1) from DCDR Cable 19" rack, DCDR Terminal block

manufact. 2 x +/-48V, 162 in 19-inch rack,
S30122-X8019-X4 S30122-X8018-
X2
2) C39195-A7944- Cable 19" rack, DCDR CSPCI /
B56 +/- 48V Si/CB F01/F02/ AP 3700
F32 and F31
3) Installation Cable AP 3700 - Rack, central (F)PE
materials 10 mm2 grounding ground point
connector central rack PE
point
4) C39195-A7944- Cable UACD (1), (2) Rack 1 ... 4,
B16/17 from -48 V, 102 -48 V, Bulk/Talk -> Terminal block
S30805-G5405-X
5) C39195-A7556- Cable UACD earth bar Rack 1 ... 4,
B540 from 0 V, 102 Terminal block
S30805-G5405-X
6) C39195-A7488- Cable Rack, central External earth (F)PE
B800 35 mm2 ground point bar
central rack PE
point

Table 3 Cables for DC connection of AP 3700 in the 19-inch cabinet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 141
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

Figure 33 shows the DCDR fuse unit for the 19" installation version

Figure 33 DCDR fuse unit for 19" installation

Technical specifications
Dimensions: Width = 435 mm,Depth = 205 mm, Height = 90 mm, Installation
height = 2 U

Weight: Complete with fuses approx. 4kg

The power supply connection cables are also supplied (see SK S30122-K7698-
X).

Fixing screws for DCDR and the terminal block for rack installation should be
obtained from the rack vendor for the specific rack used.

NOTE: The breaker panel unit DCDR must always be installed above a CSPCI
or AP3700-9/13.

Operating characteristics of DCDR:

• Operating voltage: 80 Vdc (the HiPath 4000 system always requires 60 Vdc)

• Total current per side: 80 A

• Maximum nominal current for automatic circuit breaker per slot: 25 A

IMPORTANT:
- The approved 16-A automatic circuit breaker (V39118-Z7180-A6) should always
be used to connect the cabinets CSPCI, AP3700-9, and AP 3700-13.

- In the case of LM orders based on the project planning procedures, the 16-A
automatic circuit breakers are automatically planned depending on the configu-
ration.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
142 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
AC-to-DC Connection with AP 3700

- For each DCDR, two 1-A automatic circuit breakers (V39118-Z7180-A8) are
provided in advance for the connection of external devices.

- An order with part number is required in all other cases (for example, additional
requirements).

• Cable cross-section: 35 mm2

• Short-circuit current: 3000 A

7.14.7 DC Connection of AP 3700 to the MDF

To set up a -48-V connection from an AP 3700 cabinet to an MDF, an appropriate
fuse panel must first be installed on the back of the AP 3700 because this does
not have a -48-V fuse for the MDF.

For information on where to install and connect the fuse panel, refer to Figure 34.

Fuse panel
SK -> S30805-H5412-X10
with 2 x 1-A automatic
circuit breakers
HP 4000 *)

AP 3700

-
LU LU LU LU
NA2 NA2 NA2
2) FAN module

6
CSPCI
RTM 11)
MCM on connector X210 for SAPP BB
MDF-HX8/6 (AP3700 IP) or
-UE on connector X212 for SAPP EB
2) (AP3700)
(F)PE
AC
1)
*) Fuse panel can be installed in the following locations:
SAPP BB -> X101 - X104
SAPP EB -> X101 - X106
Figure 34 DC connection of AP 3700 to the MDF

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 143
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) 19-Inch Installation

7.15 UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) 19-Inch Installation

The UACD power box (PSR930/PSR930E) is a new AC/DC power box for use in
19-inch cabinets.

It consists of the following 19-inch mounting units:

• Base cabinet PSR930 (with basic controller board A901)

• Expansion cabinet PSR930E

IMPORTANT:
- The UACD power box (PSR930/PSR930E) may only be installed in a separate,
closed 19" cabinet. This cabinet must ensure mechanical and electrical
protection and may only be serviced by authorized service personnel.
- All PSR930 lines (in the 19" cabinet) must be secured with an appropriate cord
grip (e.g. cable tie).

Base 3 x 1500 W network modules

controller Protection bar fitted
System with:
configu- 40 40 40 40 90 90
ration

or - System - Batt. 180 A

100 100 90 90

- System- Batt.
Figure 35 UACD base cabinet PSR930 (front view)

The UACD expansion cabinet PSR930E has the same structure as the base
cabinet minus the base controller.

IMPORTANT:
- Before starting up the power, ensure that all network modules on the front are
securely screwed into the shelf to guarantee a secure contact.
- If you need to replace a network moduleor change the number of network

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
144 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) 19-Inch Installation

modules,you must hold down the "System configuration" button for at least 3s on
the controller (seeFigure 35) after the replacement/expansiob to ensure that the
new network module can be reassigned to the alarm system.

To connect the power supply cables to an UACD, you must first remove the rear
covers.

First of all, remove the cover

1 panel (1) at the back of the
UACD by removing the lateral
fixing screws (2).

Figure 36 Removing the UACD Cover

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 145
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) 19-Inch Installation

Figure 37 shows the UACD base and expansion cabinet PSR930/PSR930E.

IMPORTANT: The base and expansion cabinets are physically connected left
and right at the rear by a metal bracket (indicated in green in Figure 37) (see also
the Service Manual).

1
- 2
+
Output terminals
Output terminals
+/- 48V to the
+/- 48V to the battery system

Input terminals
~230/380V from the
network
-
+/- 48V connection
+
If a base and expansion cabinet are used, the +/-48V are connected as
shown in this image.
Figure 37 UACD power box PSR930/PSR930E (back view)

To establish communication with the expansion cabinet, first connect the base
cabinet’s relevant bus cable (1) to the expansion cabinet. Then plug the base
cabinet’s contactor control monitoring cable (2) into the expansion cabinet (see
also the Service Manual).

IMPORTANT: To connect the +/-48V to the system at the UACD’s output

terminals (see Figure 37), you must first remove the blue cable connector at one
end of the cable supplied and strip the wire. This cable is connected directly to
the terminals.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
146 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) 19-Inch Installation

7.15.1 UACD Power Box Part Numbers (PSR930/

PSR930E)
Table 4 provides an overview of the equipment (and corresponding part numbers)
used in PSR930/PSR930E.

Qty. Name Part number Remark

1 PSR930 (1) EZY:S30050-G6383-X100 Power supply and distri-
bution cabinet
3 Rec/mod. GR90 EZY:S30050-K6383-X Rectifier (network module),
1500W order separately
1 Base Controller EZY:S30050-Q6383-X100 for spare parts order
4 Circuit Breaker 40A V39118-Z7180-A11 Overload protection for
system or
2 Circuit Breaker 100A V39118-Z7180-A12 Overload protection for
system
1 Circuit Breaker 180A V39118-Z7180-A14 Overload protection for the
(2x90A) battery

1 PSR930E (2) EZY:S30050-G6383-E100 Power supply and distri-

bution cabinet,
expansion
3 Rec/mod. 48V/1500W EZY:S30050-K6383-X Rectifier (network module),
order separately
4 Circuit Breaker 40A V39118-Z7180-A11 Overload protection for
system or
2 Circuit Breaker 100A V39118-Z7180-A12 Overload protection for
system
1 Circuit Breaker 180A V39118-Z7180-A14 Overload protection for the
(2x90A) battery

Table 4 Equipment in PSR930/PSR930E

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 147
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) 19-Inch Installation

7.15.2 AC/DC Connection with UACD (PSR930/

PSR930E) in 19” Cabinet with AP3700

Rack 1 Rack 2
AP3700 AP3700

UACD "new" AP3700 AP3700

# 4)
230/ PSR930
400V~ - Outg.
MDF .. 4 3 21 - - - -
+
fuse
4x40A + DCDR + + DCDR +
~ §) AP3700 AP3700

min. 2,52 230/ PSR930E

2x
400V~ -
4 3 21 CSPCI
AP3700 16mm2
+ MCM
ALIN
~ §) - + - +
FPE/PE FPE/PE
2x
21 + 16mm2 43+
Rack
->3 (2 1)
->4 (4 3)
3) 3) All lines
10qm2

&) Battery &) FPE cross-section min. 10mm2 , AWG

6 (AWG = American Wire Gage)
-
+
§) PE line is connected

Ground Busbar

#) AC terminals

Figure 38 AC/DC connection with UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) in 19” cabinet

with AP3700

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
148 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) 19-Inch Installation

7.15.3 AC/DC Connection with UACD (PSR930/

PSR930E) in 19” Cabinet with UPR/LTUW

Stack 1 Stack 4
*-X12 *-X11 *-X12 *-X11
UPR UPR
PS LTUW PS PS LTUW PS
UP UP UP UP
Talk Talk
Bulk Bulk

UACD "new" UPR UPR

# 4) PS LTUW PS
FPE PS LTUW PS
UP
UP
230/ PSR930
Outg.
UP Talk $ -A7650-B35 UP Talk
400V~ - Bulk Bulk
21 fuse
443321
+ 4x40A UPR UPR
LTUW PS LTUW PS
~ §) PS
UP
UP
PS
UP
UP
Talk Talk
Bulk Bulk
*-X14 -48V
min. 2.52 230/
400V~
PSR930E
- UCS MDF UPR *-
3bulk 4talk *-X15 3bulk 4talk PS
+
4 3 21 2) CSPCI FPE PS LTUW UP
Talk
~ §)
MCM $-A7558-B35 UP Bulk
ALIN
Stack 2
1) 3bulk 4talk FPE/PE
&) Stack 3
1bulk 2talk
-48V
MDF
3) 2) 5)
4)
* = S30805-H5298-X..
Ground Battery $ = C39195-A ....
busbar &) -
# = AC terminal block, see
+

Figure 38
MDF .. &) FPE cross-section min. 10mm2 , AWG 6
(AWG = American Wire Gage)
§) PE line is connected

Figure 39 AC/DC connection with UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) in 19” cabinet

with UPR/LTUW

Table 5 refers to Figure 38 and Figure 39.

Qty. Name Part number Remark (from --> to)

1) DC cable S30805-H5298-X14 Stack 1, UCS, -X14 --> CSPCI,
C39195-A7944-B38 Mate-N-Lok connector
2) - Cable C39195-A7944-B16/17 UACD, PSR930/930E --> Stack 1.... 4
3) + Cable C39195-A7556-B540 UACD, PSR930/930E --> Stack 1,
0-V busbar
4) ALIN cable Cable length supplied: UACD, PSR930, base controller -->
2.5 m CSPCI, MCM, ALIN
5) 0-V busbar C39165-A7080-D1 Mounted in stack 1 on the roll plate

Table 5 Cable table for UACD (PSR930/930E)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 149
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) 19-Inch Installation

7.15.4 Mains Connection Variants for UACD (PSR930/

PSR930E)
The following country-specific mains connection variants are available for UACD
(PSR930/930E):

[Link] Installing a Three-Phase Network

With a three-phase network, the 3 neutral wires are connected with a contact
jumper (1). Connect the corresponding power line as illustrated below.

Figure 40 shows the mains connection to the UACD for a three-phase network.

L1-L3 1. First connect the ground wire

N PE (PE).

1 2. Connect the neutral wire (N)

to one of the three terminals
provided for this purpose.

3. Now connect the three

phases L1, L2 and L3.

Overload protection:

3 x 10A per phase (400Vac)

Figure 40 Sample connection for a three-phase network (PSR930/PSR930E)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
150 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) 19-Inch Installation

[Link] Installing a Single-Phase Network

The jumper (1) - if still installed - must be removed for a single-phase connection.
Connect the corresponding power line as illustrated below.

Figure 41 shows the mains connection to the UACD for a one-phase network.

3xN 3xL 1. First of all unscrew the jumper

PE (1) connected to the three
neutral conductors.

1 2. Connect the ground wire

(PE).

3. Connect the three individual

neutral conductors (N).

4. Connect the three individual

phases (L).

Overload protection:

3 x 10A per phase (230Vac)

Figure 41 Installing a single-phase network (PSR930/PSR930E)

[Link] Installing a Two-Phase Network

The jumper (1) - if still installed - must be removed for a two-phase connection.
Connect the corresponding power line as illustrated below.

Figure 42 shows the mains connection to the UACD for a two-phase network.

1. First of all unscrew the jumper

L1-L2-L1-L2-L1-L2
PE (1) connected to the three
neutral conductors.

2. Connect the ground wire (PE).

1
3. Connect the individual phases
(L1/L2).

Overload protection:

6 x 10 A per phase (230 Vac or 2

x 115 Vac)

Figure 42 Installing a two-phase network (PSR930/PSR930E)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 151
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD (PSR930/PSR930E) 19-Inch Installation

[Link] Installing a Mains Delta Connection

The jumper (1) - if still installed - must be removed for a mains delta connection.
Connect the corresponding power line as illustrated below.

Figure 43 shows the mains connection to the UACD for a mains delta connection.

1. First of all unscrew the jumper

L1-L3-L2-L3-L2-L1 PE
(1) connected to the three
neutral conductors.

1 2. Connect the ground wire

(PE).

3. Connect the individual phases

(L1, L2 and L3).

Overload protection:

6 x 10 A per phase (230 Vac or 2

x 115 Vac)
Figure 43 Connecting a mains delta connection (PSR930/PSR930E)

7.15.5 Connecting a Battery to the UACD (PSR930/

PSR930E)
Proceed as indicated in the following diagram to connect a battery to the UACD.

Figure 44 shows how to connect a battery to the UACD (PSR930/PSR930E).

1. First connect the battery

cables to the UACD’s battery

PSR930 - terminals (+/-) indicated in

the diagram.

+ 2. Now connect the battery

cables to the relevant
battery.
PSR930E

Figure 44 Connecting a battery to the UACD (PSR930/PSR930E)

IMPORTANT: The UACD’s temperature sensor must be disconnected if it is not

in use or if the battery is located at a distance of over 20m from the power box.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
152 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD

7.16 UACD
Figure 45 shows the UDCD DC-to-DC power box.

IMPORTANT: The EBCCB is not used in the U.S.

X
M

EBCCB
BA
Stack 1,2,/3.4
PDPX2

ACDPX
LPC

LPC

LPC
Figure 45 UACD for a redundant LTUW cabinet

7.16.1 UACD Equipment Part Numbers

Table 6 lists the equipment and corresponding part numbers of the UACD.

Qty. Name Part number Description

1 UACD (1) S30805-G5405-X Power supply and distribution
cabinet for
HiPath 4500
1 ACDPX S30050-K7028-X1 Power supply field
3 LPC, NG-Module S30807-H6120-X1/X2 Component parts for main power
supply modules with cable types
1 PDPX2 S30807-E6250-X Terminal field
1 BAMX1 S30805-H5401-X11 Battery Manager 1, kit
BAMX1 S30807-K6215-X1 Battery Manager 1
BAEX S30050-Q7048-X Battery control and power failure
management
1 EBCCB S30807-K6710-X Battery connection with safety
cutout

Table 6 UACD equipment part numbers for a redundant LTUW cabinet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 153
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD

Qty. Name Part number Description

1 UACD (2) S30805-G5405-X Power supply and distribution
cabinet for HiPath 4500
1 ACDPX S30050-K7028-X1 Power supply field
3 LPC, NG-Module S30807-H6120-X1/X2 Component parts for main power
supply modules with cable types
1 PDPX2 S30807-E6250-X Terminal field
1 BAMX2 S30805-H5401-X12 Battery Manager 2, kit
BAMX2 S30807-K6215-X2 Battery Manager 2
1 EBCCB S30807-K6710-X Battery connection with safety
cutout

Table 6 UACD equipment part numbers for a redundant LTUW cabinet

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
154 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD

7.16.2 UACD 1 Connections

Cable Cable Cable

l N PE l N PE l N PE LPC power supply
CP1 CP2 CP3
14 A 14 A 14 A
ACDPX

LPC(1)
1 15 13
LPC(2)
1 15 13
LPC(3)
1 15 13
*) LPC, DC output:
+ 2 16 - + 2 16 - + 2 16 -
with jumper --> 53.5V
*) without jumper --> 54.7V
LPC1 LPC2 LPC3
40 A 40 A 1

Bulk
FCS
NGA1 40 A 40 A 2
NGA2 to Stack
40 A 40 A 1
1-2

Talk
NGA3
40 A 2

- 48V
70 A
POW.
NGA SHARE
BATT. PDPX2
IN
1)

X2 BAEX X8
+
-

X7 X6 X1 X3 X9
BATT. BAMX1
INPUT
BAEXF

NGAR

NGA1
NGA2
NGA3
NGA
WRA
- 48V sense

PFI
- 48V sense

70 A 14 A

CSPCI shelf PDPX2 BAMX2 EBCCB

ALIN cable
UACD 2

UACD 2
X8 -> contactor control output CAB1
Battery
X9 -> contactor control output CAB2
1) -> contactor control input
Figure 46 UACD 1 connections

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 155
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UACD

7.16.3 UACD 2 Connections

Cable Cable Cable

LPC power supply PE N l PE N l PE N l

CP1 CP2 CP3

14 A 14 A 14 A
ACDPX

LPC(1) LPC(2) LPC(3)

PE
13 15 1 13 15 1 13 15 1
*) LPC, DC output: - 16 2 + - 16 2 + - 16 2 +
with jumper --> 53.5V *)
without jumper --> 54.7V
LPC1 LPC2 LPC3

1 Bulk 40 A 40 A
FCS
40 A
to Stack 2 40 A

3-4 1 40 A 40 A
Talk

40 A
- 48V
2

70 A
POW. NGA
SHARE PDPX2 BATT.
IN

NGA3
NGA2
NGA1
+
-
BAMX2 BATT.
INPUT
1)
14 A 70 A

EBCCB
BAMX1
X9 BAEX X3
to BAEX UACD 1
UACD 1
Battery X9 -> contactor control output CAB2
1) -> contactor control input
Figure 47 UACD 2 connections

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
156 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf

7.17 Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf

EBCCB

X2
X1

EBCCB
M
M

BA
BA

Stack 3,4
PDPX2
Stack 1,2
PDPX2

ACDPX
LPC

LPC
Figure 48 Battery Manager cabinet for L80XF shelf

7.17.1 Part Numbers for Battery Manager Cabinet

Table 7 lists the equipment and corresponding part numbers of the Battery
Manager cabinet.

Qty. Name Part number Description

1 UACD S30805-G5405-X Power supply and distribution
cabinet for H4000
1 ACDPX S30050-K7028-X1 Power supply field
2 LPC, NG-Module S30807-H6120-X1/X2 Component parts for main power
supply modules with cable types
1 PDPX2 S30807-E6250-X DC terminal field
1 BAMX1 S30805-H5401-X11 Battery Manager 1, kit
BAMX1 S30807-K6215-X1 Battery Manager 1
BAEX S30050-Q7048-X Battery Control and Power Fail
Management
1 EBCCB S30807-K6710-X Batt. conn. w. automatic circuit-
breakers

1 PDPX2 S30805-H5401-X10 DC terminal field, kit

S30807-E6250-X DC terminal field
1 BAMX2 S30805-H5401-X12 Battery Manager 2, kit
BAMX2 S30807-K6215-X Battery Manager 2

Table 7 Battery Manager cabinet equipment

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 157
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf

Qty. Name Part number Description

1 EBCCB S30807-K6710-X Batt. conn. w. automatic circuit-
breakers
1 UACD S30805-G5405-X Power supply and distribution
cabinet for H4000

Table 7 Battery Manager cabinet equipment

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
158 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Battery Manager Cabinet for L80XF Shelf

7.17.2 Battery Manager, Connection Configurations

Line
l N PE LPC power supply Line
l N PE

CP1 14A CP3 14A

ACDPX

LPC(1) LPC(3) *) LPC, DC output:

1 15 13
+ 2 16 -
1 15 13
+ 2 16 -
with jumper --> 53.5V
without jumper --> 54.7V
*) *)
FCS
LPC1 LPC2 LPC3 LPC1 LPC2 LPC3

40 A 1 40 A 1

Bulk
NGA1
Bulk
LPC1 40 A 2 to 40 A 2 to
NGA1 stack LPC1 40 A 1 stack
40 A 40 A 1
1-2 3-4

Talk
Talk
40 A
40 A 2 40 A 2

- 48V
- 48V

70 A 70 A
NGA POW. NGA
BATT. PDPX2 PDPX2 POW.
SHARE BATT. SHARE
IN IN
1)
NGA
BAMX1 BAMX2
X2 BAEX X8 -

+
-
+

X7 X6 X1 X3 X9
BATT.
NGA BATT. INPUT
BAEXF

NGAR
- 48V sense
- 48V sense

NGA
WRA

PFI

INPUT
1)

14 A 70 A 14 A 70 A
CCDAX-BGR
ALIN cable
EBCCB EBCCB

X8 -> contactor control output BAMX1

X9 -> contactor control output BAMX2 Battery Battery
1) -> contactor control input
Figure 49 Battery Manager, connection configurations

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 159
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UDCD, North America Only

7.18 UDCD, North America Only

Stack 1,2/3,4

ICBP
Zytron

Zytron

Zytron
ODP

BUA

Figure 50 UDCD DC-to-DC power box (North America only)

7.18.1 UDCD Equipment Part Numbers, North America

Only
Table 8 lists the equipment and corresponding part numbers of the UDCD.

Qty. Name Part number Description

1 BUA S30805-G5409-X Base Unit (Base unit assembly)

1 UDCD (1) S30805-G5406-A Unit DC Distribution

1 ICBP S30807-E6588-X Input circuit breaker panel
3 Zytron-Module S30122-H5308-X DC-to-DC converter
1 ODP S30807-E6589-X Output distribution panel
DCPFX S30807-Q6220-X DC power fail card

1 UDCD (2) S30805-G5406-X Unit DC Distribution

1 ICBP S30807-E6588-X Input circuit breaker panel
3 Zytron-Module S30122-H5308-X DC-to-DC converter
1 ODP S30807-E6589-X
DCPFX S30807-Q6220-X

Table 8 Equipment for UDCD DC-to-DC power box

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
160 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
UDCD, North America Only

7.18.2 Overview of UDCD stack 1 connections

(+) COM.
EMI filter MODE –48 Vdc
(-) CHOKE
CB RET
100 Protective
- + - + ground
BUA

J2 J1

CB1 CB2 CB3 ICBP UDCD (1)

30 30 30
J5 J4 J3
J6 J6 J6
Zytron Zytron Zytron
(1) (2) (3)
+- +- +-
J7 J7 J7
J9 J8 J9 J8
J21 J20 J19
- 48V 40 A J18 Talk
40 AJ17 Bulk to
stack(1)
J16 RTN

J7 J6 J5 ODP
E3 DCPFX

J2 J1

CB1 CB2 CB3 ICBP UDCD (2)

30 30 30
J5 J4 J3
J6 J6 J6
Zytron Zytron Zytron
(1) (2) (3)
+- +- +-
J7 J7 J7
J9 J8 J9 J8
J21 J20 J19
- 48V 40 A J18 Talk

40 A J17 Bulk to
stack(2)
J16 RTN

J7 J6 J5
E4 ODP
DCPFX E3 to CSPCI or
stack 2
DCPFX E4
Figure 51 Overview of UDCD Stack 1 Connections

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 161
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Connecting the Power Box to the System

7.19 Connecting the Power Box to the System

To connect the power box to the system:

1. Attach the cable from connector X1 in the BAMX1 (BAEX) to the ALIN
connector in the CSPCI box (stack 1).

2. From PDPX2 (1), stack 1/2, and PDPX2 (2), stack 3/4, connect one –48-V
TALK and one –48-V BULK cable to the relevant –48-V connectors on the
lower shelves at the back of each stack. Table 9 and Figure 52 show how to
connect the bulk and talk cables from the BAMX to the HiPath 4000 cabinets.

Stack 1 (CABCCD) Stack 2 (LTU..4) Stack 3 (LTU..8) Stack 4 (LTU..12)

TALK PDPX2 (1) to TALK NEW CAB TALK PDPX2 (2) to TALK NEW CAB
center -48-V PDPX2 (1) to center center -48-V PDPX2 (2) to center
connector -48-V connector connector -48-V connector
BULK PDPX2 (1) to BULK NEW CAB BULK PDPX2 (2) to TALK NEW CAB
right -48-V PDPX2 (1) to right - right -48-V PDPX2 (2) to right -
connector 48-V connector connector 48-V connector

Table 9 List of redundant -48-V connections between BAMX and a HiPath

4000 cabinet
Refer also to the “Section 7.20, “PSDXE Connection”” for additional information.

Back
Stack 4 Stack 3 Stack 2 Stack 1
Power
LTU.. 15 LTU.. 11 LTU.. 7 LTU.. 3
box
LTU.. 14 LTU.. 10 LTU.. 6 LTU.. 2

LTU.. 13 LTU.. 9 LTU.. 5 LTU.. 1

LTU.. 12 LTU.. 8 LTU.. 4 CSPCI

TALK TALK TALK TALK BULK

NEW CAB PDPX2(2) NEW CAB PDPX2(1) PDPX2(1)
PDPX2(2) PDPX2(1)
BULK BULK
-48 V MDF
BULK
NEW CAB PDPX2(2) NEW CAB
PDPX2(2) PDPX2(1)

Figure 52 Redundant -48-V connections from PDPX2 to the shelves

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
162 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Connecting the Power Box to the System

7.19.1 Connecting the MDF for a Redundant System,

I.M.
The power supply for the main distribution frame is branched from UACD 1 (–48-
V connector unit TALK PDPX2(1)) and connected to the main distribution frame
by means of two 1.6-A fuses. (Refer to Figure 53).

The –48 V connectors from the MDFs can be combined as required. Ensure that
the number of MDFs connected at a fuse does not exceed the overall power
requirement for each 1.6 A fuse.

Stack 1

LTU.. 3

LTU.. 2

LTU.. 1

-48 V
TALK
PDPX2(1) -48 V MDF
Figure 53 Redundant -48-V connection unit for MDF

The main distribution frame connection of –48 V is the same as that described in
the Section 7.13.2, “Connecting the MDF for a Nonredundant, System, I.M.”.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 163
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
PSDXE Connection

7.20 PSDXE Connection

Figure 54 shows the connectors in the PSDXE required for connecting the power
supply and the battery manager to the system.

PSDXE -48 V BULK

Power box 1 X7 BAMX2
X2
(back view) X6 BAMX1 -48 V TALK
NGA X3
PDPX2 -48 V BULK
Power box 2
X8 ALIN
X -48 V TALK NEW CAB
BAMX2 CSPCI shelf POWER
X9
Power box 2 BAEX NEW CAB SHARE

Battery IN

UBATT EBCCB
NGA

BAMX1 PDPX2
Figure 54 PSDXE connection

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
164 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Calculating the Battery Cabling, I.M.

7.21 Calculating the Battery Cabling, I.M.

–––––– mm2 ––––––– System

battery cable power
2 2 2
702 952 2x702 at Uv
cross section 162 25 35 50
Stack 1 PSU2 15 23 32 46 65 84 130 46 A
+
Stack 2 PSU3 Cable 10 15 22 31 43 56 86 69 A
1.5 V
PSU4 length 23 A
Stack 3
+ PSU5 (m) 15 23 32 46 65 84 130 46 A
Stack 4 PSU6 31 56 86 69 A
10 15 22 43
Figure 55 Battery cable cross-section

• Minimum system voltage 42.5 V at the BAEX module (in the BAMX1 in
CABPSD)

• Permissible voltage drop (Uv) on the battery cable, from the terminal to the
battery, if the battery is to be discharged to 44V (1.83V/battery)

• The system current is based on the power supply units output as follows:

– Maximum 2 UACDs with up to 6 power supply units (PSUs)

– For every PSU -->continuous load 23 A

– Maximum 23 A x n (PSU) (power supplies are in accordance to Figure 56)

NOTE: If possible, the battery cable cross-section should not be less than 70
mm2, even in configurations with fewer than 6 PSUs. A cross-section of at least
70 mm2 if the configuration is subsequently expanded to the maximum of 6 PSUs
in order to ensure proofing against short-circuits. Expansions should always
provide for a certain reserve, as otherwise, the battery cable must be reinforced
or replaced if the voltage drop (Uv) is exceeded at 1.5 V.

2 x # (m) x * (qty) x 23 (A) ? =

= ? mm2 per +/ - cable
1.5 (Uv) x 58(æ) 87

The formula must be supplemented #) = Distance between system & battery

with two values: *) = Required number of PSUs

Figure 56 Formula for calculating battery cable cross-section

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 165
7_Netzanschluss.fm
Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply
Calculating the Battery Cabling, I.M.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
166 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 8_InterneLeitungen.fm
Internal Line Cables
Installing Signal Cables

8 Internal Line Cables

This chapter provides instructions for installing internal cables on the HiPath 4000
system.

8.1 Installing Signal Cables

Signal cables are referred to as LTU signal cables. Signal cables should already
be connected when the system is shipped out of the factory. Should the cables
become loose or removed during transit, install the signal cables on the HiPath
4000 as follows:

NOTE: To avoid a short-circuit, ensure that the power on the system is off before
connecting and removing the LTU cables.

1. Table 1 contains an overview of the signal cable connections between the

LTUCA ports of the LTU/AP3700 expansion cabinets (see Figure 1) and the
CSPCI backplane ports on the RTM board (see Figure 2).

The following default cable lengths are used depending on the installation
variant:

• 2 m (in stack 1)

• 5 m (from stack 2-4)

• 5 m or 10 m (if the CSPCI frame is installed in the external 19" frame)

System Type From To

Mono LTU.. 1 - LTU.. 15 (LTUCA mod. CCA) CSPCI RTM MOD. (SLOT
1/2)

Duplex LTU.. 1 - LTU.. 15 (LTUCA mod. CCA) CSPCI RTM MOD. (SLOT
2/3)
LTU.. 1 - LTU.. 15 (LTUCA mod. CCB) CSPCI RTM MOD. (SLOT
5/6)

Table 1 Signal cable connections

The cables for trunk failure transfer, reference clock and alarm signaling are
connected to the MCM board.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 167
8_InterneLeitungen.fm
Internal Line Cables
Installing Signal Cables

Mono

LTUCA
LTU/
AP 3700 Duplex

WHB
WHA

CCB
CCA
RUN FAIL
Figure 1 LTUCA board in the LTU/AP 3700 shelf (CCA/CCB)

LTU/AP 3700 1-15

RTM mod.

MCM mod. [Link]. ALIN

ALUM

Figure 2 CSPCI backplane (RTM board), example mono

2. All cables that lead to the main distribution frames (I.M.) must be attached to
the relevant stack frames with cable fasteners (see Figure 3).

This figure shows the cable attachment

points on the stack.

Figure 3 Attaching cables on the HiPath 4000

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
168 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 8_InterneLeitungen.fm
Internal Line Cables
Installing Signal Cables

8.1.1 Overview of CSPCI (RTM Board) Connection to

L80XF/LTUW/AP 3700 (LTUCA Board)

C39195- 20 20 20 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Z7211-A...

L80XF/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LTUW/
AP3700
Front CCA CCA CCA CCA CCA CCA CCA CCA CCA CCA CCA CCA CCA CCA CCA
LTUCA mod.

CSPCI

Cab. LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU
connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SLOT, rear
1st RTM, mono R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2 R1/2
or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or
1st RTM, R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3 R2/3
duplex R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6 R5/6
2nd RTM,
duplex
Cab. LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU
connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Front CCB CCB CCB CCB CCB CCB CCB CCB CCB CCB CCB CCB CCB CCB CCB
LTUCA mod.
L80XF/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LTUW/
AP3700

Table 2 Overview of CSPCI (RTM board) connection to L80XF/LTUW/AP

3700 (LTUCA board)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 169
8_InterneLeitungen.fm
Internal Line Cables
Installing Signal Cables

8.1.2 Overview of CSPCI Periphery Connections

Service Adapt. f. LTUCA/ UACD MDF
1) Modem/ 2) Periph. Box 3) / 4)
Terminal

Front cable

Front cable

Front cable

Front cable

Rear
Rear

Rear

Rear

Rear
CSPCI SLOT 1/2/5 6
> -----DSCXL----- SF2X8 RTM ----MCM----
Mod.
KAST name LAN V24 V24 LAN LAN5 V24 [Link] ALIN ASW
8-8pos 9-9pos 9-24pos 8-8pos 8-8pos 9-24pos 25-25pos 10-10pos 1SU-open
C39195-Z7211- 7...120 7...120 20...100
A..
S30267-Z355- 25 25
A..
C39195-Z7602- 30/100
A..
S30267-Z19-A.. 30
S30267-Z317- 50...950
A..3)
S30267-Z358- 50...200
A..4)
S30267-Z304- 9
A..

Table 3 Overview of CSPCI periphery connections

1) LAN 8 pos (connector/connector)

– f. customer
– f. service
– f. IPDA
– f. Atlantik
2) LAN 8 pos (connector/connector)

– f. 8x customer

– f. 2x service

3) Cable for ASW (alarm signaling), Ger/I.M.

4) Cable for ASW (alarm signaling), U.S.

5) 15 LAN cable for LTU1...LTU15 (AP3700 --> 1 ... 15), see also label on RTM
panel (cable lengths: 2m, 5m, 10m)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
170 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 8_InterneLeitungen.fm
Internal Line Cables
Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass

8.2 Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass

To install the service alarm cable and trunk bypass on the HiPath 4000:

The connectors for the alarm interface and trunk failure transfer are located on
the MCM board in the CSPCI frame (rear).

1. Connect the cable for trunk bypass (S30267-Z317-A*) to the 1SU connector
(ALUM) on the MCM board

2. Terminate this open-end cable properly at the MDF.

3. Connect the cable for the alarm interface (C39195-Z7904-A25) to the ALIN
connector on the MCM board and connect the other end of the cable to the
ALIN connector on the UACD cabinet (see also Figure 2).

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 171
8_InterneLeitungen.fm
Internal Line Cables
Installing the Service Alarm Cable and Trunk Bypass

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
172 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies

9 External Cabling Assemblies

This chapter provides installation and cabling diagrams for the HiPath 4000
system. Diagrams for the IPDA are located in the associated chapter. Unless
otherwise noted, all diagrams apply to both U.S. and I.M. installations.

This section describes the assembly of the main distribution frames and the
cables that must be connected from the MDF splitting strips to the corresponding
LTU/AP 3700 slots in the HiPath 4000 (also refer to the cable plugging list that
accompanies the relevant system). Two different MDFs can be used (MDFHX6/
MDFHX 8) depending on the system configuration.

NOTE: In new installations, always connect shielding wires. Do not modify

existing shielding wires if a main distribution frame is already being used. Do not
use shielding wires for ground distribution. Use the YV 2x0.5/0.9 jumper wires for
jumpering.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 173
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
MDFHX6 Assembly, I.M.

9.1 MDFHX6 Assembly, I.M.

A01:
Carrier for special modules
(ALUM relay, automatic B
cutout etc.)

B/F: C
Plate (attachment for internal
and external ground cable)

C01-C16:
24 DA splitting strips
A
(internal connections for
system LTUE network)

D001-D19:
35 DA strapping
connectors (external
connections for server, AC,
line and CO network) D

Figure 1 MDFHX6 assembly

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
174 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
MDFHX6 Assembly, I.M.

9.1.1 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M.

LTU.. 2
MDF 2 Back view

SLOT 121

SLOT 108
SLOT 103
SLOT 097
SLOT 091
SLOT 085
SLOT 079

SLOT 067
SLOT 061
SLOT 055
SLOT 049
SLOT 043
SLOT 037
SLOT 031
SLOT 025
SLOT 115
16 09 08 01
LTU.. 1
MDF 1
Back view
1 per 24 pair a/b 24
MDF splitting strip 16

MDF splitting strip 09

MDF splitting strip 08

1 24
MDF splitting strip 01

Figure 2 LTU to MDF cabling

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 175
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
MDFHX6 Assembly, I.M.

9.1.2 Cable Routing from AP 3700-13 Cabinet to the

MDF, I.M.

MDF 2 AP 3700-13 Box 2

Slot 7 on the backplane

is not assigned and is
consequently not
counted for MDF cable
installation.

MDF 1 13 09 08 01

1 per 24 pair a/b 24

AP 3700-13
MDF splitting strip 13 Box 1
Back view

MDF splitting strip 09

MDF splitting strip 08

1 24
MDF splitting strip 01

Figure 3 Cable routing from AP 3700-13 cabinet to MDFHX6

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
176 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
MDFHX8 Assembly, I.M.

9.2 MDFHX8 Assembly, I.M.

F/A:
10
Carrier for special modules
(ALUM relay, automatic B
cutout, etc.)
C
B:
Plate (attachment for internal
and external ground cable) A 01 A

C01-C08:
24 DA splitting strips
(internal connections for D
system CC80F, L80XF, and
RMS24 networks)

D001-D10:
35 DA strapping connectors F
(external connections for F1 F2
server, AC2, line and CO
network)

35 DA strapping connectors for AC, line and CO network

ECBPC fuse bar, 18 x 0.2 A fuses for CMI power supply
Mounting plate for external cables and shielding wires
Figure 4 MDFHX8 assembly

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 177
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
MDFHX8 Assembly, I.M.

9.2.1 Cabling from the LTU to the MDF, I.M.

SLOT 109
SLOT 103
SLOT 097
SLOT 091
SLOT 085
SLOT 079

SLOT 067
SLOT 061
SLOT 055
SLOT 049
SLOT 043
SLOT 037
SLOT 031
SLOT 025
SLOT 115
SLOT 121
01 08 01 08

LTU..
MDF 2 Back

1 per 24 pair a/b 24

MDF splitting strip 08

1 24
MDF splitting strip 01

MDF 1
1 24
MDF splitting strip 08

1 24
MDF splitting strip 01
Figure 5 Cabling from the LTU to MDFHX8

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
178 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
MDFHX8 Assembly, I.M.

9.2.2 Cable Routing from AP 3700-13 Cabinet to the

MDF, I.M.

Slot 7 on the backplane is

not assigned and is conse-
quently not counted for MDF
cable installation.

13 09 08 01
MDF 2
AP 3700-13
1 per 24 pair a/b 24 Box 1
MDF splitting strip 08
Back view
1 24
MDF splitting strip 01

MDF 1
1 24
MDF splitting strip 08

1 24
MDF splitting strip 01

Figure 6 Cable routing from AP 3700-13 cabinet to MDFHX8

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 179
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Overvoltage Protection of the Modules, I.M.

9.3 Overvoltage Protection of the Modules, I.M.

Overvoltage protection is integrated in the module for 24DA cables. The cable
connectors do not contain any other overvoltage protection devices.

Where necessary, you can use overvoltage protectors to protect external cables
to the main distribution frame against atmospheric pressure.

SWU MDF
FPE cable in
accordance with
DIN EN 50310

Cable with overvoltage

protection
KAST 24DA
in the MDF
TM../SLM..
Cable without over-
LTUW voltage protection
in the MDF
& = Splitting strip (MDFHX)C39334 - A166 - A1/A2
$ = Strapping connector (MDFHX) C39334 - A166 - A3/A7

Figure 7 Varistors and overvoltage protectors

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
180 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
MDF Cable Connections, I.M.

9.4 MDF Cable Connections, I.M.

IMPORTANT: PIN assignment is different on the LTUW backplane and the cable
connectors!

Connect. Cable Connect. Cable Connect. Cable

Pin Pin Pin
Mo Cab Wire Cable Color Mo Cab Wire Cable Color Mo Cab Wire Cable Color
d Pin Wire Ring d Pin Wire Ring d Pin Wire Ring
1 20 1a White--Blue 17 4 9a Red--Brown 43 58 17a Yellow--
Orange
23 38 1b Blue--White 18 3 9b Brown--Red 44 57 17b Orange--
Yellow
3 18 2a White-- 19 2 10a Red--Gray 45 56 18a Yellow--
Orange Green
4 17 2b Orange-- 20 1 10b Gray--Red 46 55 18b Green--
White Yellow
5 16 3a White-- 24 37 11a Black--Blue 47 54 19a Yellow--
Green Brown
6 15 3b Green-- 25 36 11b Blue--Black 48 53 19b Brown--
White Yellow
7 14 4a White-- 26 35 12a Black-- 49 52 20a Yellow--
Brown Orange Gray
8 13 4b Brown-- 27 34 12b Orange-- 50 51 20b Gray--
White Black Yellow
9 12 5a White--Gray 29 32 13a Black-- 51 50 21a Violet--Blue
Green
10 11 5b Gray--White 30 31 13b Green-- 52 49 21b Blue--Violet
Black
11 10 6a Red--Blue 31 30 14a Black-- 53 48 22a Violet--
Brown Orange
12 9 6b Blue--Red 32 29 14b Brown-- 54 47 22b Orange--
Black Violet
13 8 7a Red-- 34 27 15a Black--Gray 55 46 23a Violet--
Orange Green
14 7 7b Orange-- 35 26 15b Gray--Black 56 45 23b Green--
Red Violet
15 6 8a Red--Green 37 24 16a Yellow--Blue 57 44 24a Violet--
Brown
16 5 8b Green--Red 38 23 16b Blue--Yellow 58 43 24b Brown--
Violet

Table 1 MDF 16DA/24DA cabling

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 181
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting the Signal or Alarm Cables to the MDF, I.M.

9.5 Connecting the Signal or Alarm Cables to the MDF, I.M.

Connect the signal or alarm cable to the MCM board (ALUM connector) and to
the main distribution frame on splitting strip D1 (only on MDF1). For D1 splitting
strip, see Figure 1).

ALUM (trunk failure transfer)

The following three signals from the DSCXL module are routed via this interface:

• ALUM (trunk failure transfer), max. 1A/30W

• NAL (Not urgent Alarm)

• UAL (Urgent Alarm)

These signals are transmitted via relays to the front connector (15-pin), which is
connected in turn to the main distribution frame via the cable C39195-Z7612-A*
(DSub connector, open end).

11 = ALUM 1
06 = ALUM 2
02 = NAL 1
03 = NAL 2
10 = UAL 1
05 = UAL 2

Figure 8 ALUM pin assignment

ALUM cable types

Part number Type Cable

length
C39195-Z7612-A100 ASW cable to MDF 10m
C39195-Z7612-A200 ASW cable to MDF 20m
C39195-Z7612-A550 ASW cable to MDF 55m
C39195-Z7612-A950 ASW cable to MDF 90m
C39195-Z7613-A50 ASW cable to patch panel (release for IM) 5m
C39195-Z7614-A100 ASW cable to MDF 10m
C39195-Z7614-A150 ASW cable to MDF 15m

Table 2 ALUM cable types

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
182 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

9.6 Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

Cable wiring on module

1 41 21 01
2
3 1a
4
X15
2a
6 17a 1b
7 2b
8 17b 11a
9
10 18a 11b
3a
1 3b
2 18b 12a
3
4 19a 12b
4a
X25
6 19b
4b
7 5a
8 20a 13a
9 5b Wire pair
10 20b 13b
1
2 21a 14a
6a 24DA
3
4 21b 14b 6b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 131415 16
X35
6 22a 7a max.16x
7 7b 1 2 3 <--- Mod. slot ---> 15 16 MDF cable
8 22b 15a
9
8a 1 1
10 23a 15b
Front view 24 DA
1 23b 8b 24 24
2
3 24a 16a
4 9a
X45
6 24b 16b 9b
7
Module LTUW
8 10a
9
10 10b
S30804-B5367-X
60 40 20
4 3 2 10

MDFHX (max. 24 DA)

16
1.-Wire pair-8. 9.-Wire pair-16. 17.-Wire pair-24.

Splitting MDF
strip 16 cable
1. -Wire pair-8. 9.-Wire pair-16. 17.-Wire pair-24.
1

Splitting
strip 1

Figure 9 Connecting subscriber line modules/trunk boards

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 183
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

9.6.1 Subscriber-Line Module Boards

Part No. Board Remarks

S30810- Abbreviation
-Q6194-X SLCSM
-Q2153-X SLMQ
-Q2153-X100 SLMQ
-Q2141-X SLMA
-Q2191-X SLMA3
-Q2246-X SLMA
Q2191-C SLMAC
Q2225-X SLMAE
-Q2193-X100 SLC24 Symmetrical signaling lines
-Q2193-X200 SLC24 Asymmetrical signaling lines
-Q2479-X SLMQ3
-Q2160-X STMA OWG-multimode
-Q2160-X100 STMA OWG-singlemode
-Q2163-X STMD2
-Q2163-X100 STMD2
-Q2168-X SLMO2
-Q2174-X STMD
-Q2177-X STHC
-Q2184-X SLMAB
-Q2169-X100 SLMOP
-Q2480-X SLMAR
-Q2809-X100 SLMT Project-specific
-Q2816-X SLMY
-Q2324-500X STMI4
-Q2324-510X STMI4
-Q2815-X STMVI

Table 3 Subscriber line modules and part numbers

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
184 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

[Link] Connecting the Subscriber Line Modules

Table 4 lists the line connections for the subscriber line modules.

..... Subscriber Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID Damping Remarks Mo PE
DTM Prop ISD
S30810- F DP Dig. N d. Circu
it
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SLC24 1 km LT - digital UP0/E 24 1
-Q2193-X X For local feed; 4 x B (48 Kbps)
X dependent on cable + D (24 Kbps)
type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMA 2 x 750 Ohm TS - analog Dual SICOFI 16 1
-Q2141-X 001XH X X 0 dB ± 0.3 dB
7 dB ± 0.3 dB for DP and DTMF terminals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMAR 2 x 600 Ohm TS - analog Quad- SICOFI 8 1
-Q2480-X EB0XH X X 3 dB ± 0.3 dB
(FRG) for DP and DTMF terminals
-10 dB ± 0.3 dB
(FRG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
SLMA2 2 x 600 Ohm TS - analog Quad- SICOFI 24 1
-Q2246-X EC0XH X X 3 dB ± 0.3 dB
(FRG) for DP and DTMF terminals
-10 dB ± 0.3 dB
(FRG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Table 4 Subscriber line module connections (page 1 of 3)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 185
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

..... Subscriber Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID Damping Remarks Mo PE
DTM DP Prop ISD
S30810- F Dig. N d. Circu
it
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SLMOP 1 km TS - digital UP0/E 24 1
-Q2180-X 009XH X X For local feed; 2 x B (64 Kbps)
dependent on cable + D (16 Kbps)
resistance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMO2 1 km TS - digital UP0/E 24 1
-Q2168-X 80FXH X X For local feed; 2 x B (64 Kbps)
dependent on cable + D (16 Kbps)
resistance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMQ 5.5 ... 9 km TS - digital or 2B1Q-Uk0 16 1
-Q2133-X 078XH X For local feed; NT PABX or
dependent on cable 2 x B (64 Kbps)
resistance LT-+NT operation + D
(16 Kbps)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
SLMQ 5.5 ... 9 km LT - digital or 2B1Q-Uk0 16 1
-Q2153-X 07AXH X X For local feed; LT-+NT operation
- 07CXH X X dependent on cable 2 x B (64 Kbps) + D (64 Kbps)
X100 resistance

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Table 4 Subscriber line module connections (page 2 of 3)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
186 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

..... Subscriber Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID Damping Remarks Mo PE
DTM DP Prop ISD
S30810- F Dig. N d. Circu
it
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
STMD 1000 m TS/AS - digital ISDN, S0 8 2
-Q2174-X 077XH X (to NT) 2 x B (64 Kbps)
+ D (16 Kbps)
R=receive, T=transmit
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 a10 a11 a12 a13 a14 a15
b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15
S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T
STHC 1000 m TS/AS - digital UP0/E 16 1
-Q2177-X 375XH X (extended bus 2 x B (64 Kbps) S0 4 2
500 m + D (16 Kbps)
short bus 150 m R=receive, T=transmit
in subscriber
mode)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 a10 a11 a12 a13 a14 a15 a16 a17 a18 a19 a20 a21 a22 a23
b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15 b16 b17 b18 b19 b20 b21 b22 b23
S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
R T R T R T R T
STMD2 1000 m TS/AS - digital ISDN, S0 8 2
-Q2163-X 075XH X (to NT) 2 x B (64 Kbps)
- 074XH + D (16 Kbps)
X100 R=receive, T=transmit
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 a10 a11 a12 a13 a14 a15
b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15
S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T
Table 4 Subscriber line module connections (page 3 of 3)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 187
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

9.6.2 Trunk Module Part Numbers

Part No. Board Remarks

S30810- Abbreviation
Q2226-X200 DIUT2
Q2327-X100 TMANI
Q2197-T TMDID
-Q2012-X100 TMEM
-Q2064-X100 TMLR
-Q2123-X TMLBL
-Q2123-X100 TMLBL
-Q2147-X TMSFP
-Q2147-X300 TMSFP
-Q2147-X400 TMSFP
-Q2159-X100 TM2LP
-Q2159-X110 TM2LP
-Q2159-X120 TM2LP
-Q2159-X130 TM2LP
-Q2159-X140 TM2LP
-Q2159-X150 TM2LP
-Q2159-X160 TM2LP
-Q2159-X170 TM2LP
-Q2159-X180 TM2LP
-Q2159-X190 TM2LP
-Q2452-X TMDID
-Q2286-X TMLRB
-Q2186-X100 TMLRB
-Q2216-X DIU2U
-Q2214-X100 TMOM2
-Q2288-X TMCOW
-Q2288-X10 TMCOW
-Q2288-X20 TMCOW
-Q2288-X40 TMCOW
-Q2288-X50 TMCOW
-Q2288-X60 TMCOW
-Q2288-X100 TMCOW
-Q2288-X120 TMCOW
-Q2288-X130 TMCOW

Table 5 Subscriber line modules and part numbers

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
188 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

Part No. Board Remarks

S30810- Abbreviation
-Q2288-X310 TMCOW
-Q2292-X100 TMEW2
-Q2476-X TM3WO
-Q2477-X TM3WI
-Q2469-X TMEMUS
-Q2485-X TMC16

Table 5 Subscriber line modules and part numbers

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 189
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

[Link] Connecting the Trunk Modules to the MDF

Table 6 lists the trunk module connections to the MDF.

..... Trunk Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID DTM DP DP 2.W Damping Remarks mo per
S30810- F 1.6: 2:1 T lL = Long cable d. Circu
or 1 kL = Short cable it
MFC
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMEM 2 x 1000 Ohm Tie-line circuit with E&M, CF 4 3
-Q2012- 021XH X -3.5/-3.5 dBr code and
X100 WTK1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 - - - -
------ --- ------ --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
ka ka ka ka ga ga ga ga E E E E
kb kb kb kb gb gb gb gb M M M M
TMEW2 2 x 1000 Ohm Tie-line circuit with E&M and 4 4
-Q2292- 029XH DT X X X CF code
X100 MF SICOFI
With strap option
Assignment:

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
AE AE AE AE AM AM AM AM E E E E MA MA MA MA <--
BE BE BE BE BM BM BM BM M M M M MB MB MB MB Standard
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
T T T T T1 T1 T1 T1 E E E E - - - - <--
R R R R R1 R1 R1 R1 M M M M - - - - Type I
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
Fan Fan Fan Fan Fab Fab Fab Fab - - - - - - - - <--
A A A A A A A A San SanSanSan - - - - Type Ia
B B B B B B B B Sab SabSabSab - - - - -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---------------
T T T T T1 T1 T1 T1 E E E E M M M M <--
R R R R R1 R1 R1 R1 SG SG SG SG SB SB SB SB Type II
Table 6 Connection to MDF (page 1 of 3)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
190 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

..... Trunk Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID DTM DP DP 2.W Damping Remarks mo per
S30810- F 1.6: 2:1 T lL = Long cable d. Circu
or 1 kL = Short cable it
MFC
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMLBL 2 x 9 KOhm Local battery bi-directional 8 1
-Q2123-X 43AXH DT -7/-0 dB COFI
MF lL: -0/-7 dB No direct inward dialing
kL: -5/-2 dB (DID)
- 436XH -7/-0 dB
X100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
TMLR 2 x 1000 Ohm Tie-line circuit - direct 2 1
-Q2064- 0A5XH DTM X depending on current loop
X100 F remote system; Bi-directional SICOFI

1 - 2 -
--- --- --- ---
a a
b b
TMOM2 a/b > 17 mA APSE QUAD-SICOFI 4 3
-Q2214- 051XH DT X max. 2 x 500 / 1000 (adapter for special
MF Ohm equipment)
X100 (depending on Paging equipment, dictation
partner) equipment, TERM, ELA,
c-wire max. NWS, announcement
200Ohm equipment, QU, and
(with 3-wire outgoing loop monitoring
connection)
-0/-7 dBr
1 3 2 4 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a J D J D J D J D
b b b b P C P C P C P C
Table 6 Connection to MDF (page 2 of 3)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 191
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

..... Trunk Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID DTM DP DP 2.W Damping Remarks mo per
S30810- F 1.6: 2:1 T lL = Long cable d. Circu
or 1 kL = Short cable it
MFC
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMSFP -4.0/-4.0 dBr Tie-line circuit with DTMF 8 2
-Q2147-X 43BXH DTM X X -3.5/-3.5 dBr signaling Dual SICOFI 4Dr
- 43EXH F *) *) : 2600 Hz
x300 43FXH -6.0/-1.0 dBr 1200/1600 Hz
- -7.0/-0.0 dBr 2100 Hz
x400 600/750 Hz *) DTMF signaling

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab Fan Fab
AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM AE AM
BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM BE BM
0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7
Table 6 Connection to MDF (page 3 of 3)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
192 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

[Link] Connection to MDF with DID

Table 9-3 lists the trunk connections to the MDF with DID.

..... Trunk Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode DID Range Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID DTM DP DP 2.W Damping Remarks mo per
S30810- F 1.6: 2:1 T lL = Long cable d. Circu
or 1 kL = Short cable it
MFC
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMLRB DP, 2 x 1000 Ohm Trunk circuit with DID 8 1.5
-Q2286-X 460XH DTMF, lL: -8/+2 dBr SICOFI
MFC kL: -5/-1 dBr incoming/outgoing
R2; lL: -7.9/-2.9 dBr feed in CPBX
SocotelkL: -4.9/-5.9 dBr
-5/-2 dBr
1 3 5 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 4 6 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a bu bu bu bu
b b b b b b b b bu bu bu bu
TM3WI DT 2 x 1500 Ohm Trunk circuit with DID 4 1
-Q2477-X EEFXH MF - 3.5/ -1 dBr SICOFI
C X X incoming
sig Loop code and
n rering evaluation
1 2 3 4
--- --- --- ---
a a a a
b b b b
b1 b1 b1 b1
TM3WO DT 2 x 1500 Ohm Trunk circuit 4 2
-Q2476-X EEEXH MF X X -3.5/-6 dBr QUAD-SICOFI 3Dr
MF Outgoing
C Local exchange
sign
1 - 1 - 2 - 2 - 3 - 3 - 4 - 4 -
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a c a c a c a c
b b b b
Table 9-3 Connection to MDF with DID

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 193
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

[Link] Connecting to the MDF with CDR and DID

Table 7 lists the trunk connections to the MDF with CDR and DID.

..... Trunk Circuits .....

Name / HW Dial Mode for CDR DID Range Type of per a/b
Part No. ID CO Damping Operation mo per
S30810- DTM DP DP 2.W 50 12 16 Sil lL = Long Remarks d. circu
F 1.6: 2:1 T Hz kHz kHz Rev cable it
or 1 kL = Short
MFC cable
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TM2LP AS QSICOFI 8 1
-Q2159-
X100 480XH DID
X110 481XH DID
X120 482XH X X X X X DID/
X130 483XH X X X X X X X DOD MSI
X140 484XH X X X X X X X MSI
X150 485XH X X X X X X X MSI
X160 486XH X X X X X X X MSI
X170 487XH X X X X X X MSI
X180
1 3 5 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 4 6 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a bu bu bu bu
b b b b b b b b bu bu bu bu
Table 7 Connection to the MDF with CDR and DID

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
194 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Connecting Subscriber Line Modules/Trunk Boards

[Link] Connecting to the MDF with CDR but without DID

Table 8 lists the trunk connections to the MDF with CDR but without DID.

..... Trunk Circuits .....

ID/ HW Dial Mode for CDR Range
Type of Operation per a/b
Part No. ID CO Damping Remarks Mo per
S30810- DTM DP DP 2.W 50 12 16 Sil lL = Long cable d. Circu
F 1.6: 2:1 T Hz kHz kHz Rev kL = Short cable it
or 1
MFC
MDF cable a/b no., circuit no. per module, wire identification per circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TMCOW 2x185-530Ohm DUAL-SICOFI 8 1
(J = 20 mA) Trunk circuit
-Q2288-X 450XH X X X X kL: -5/-2 dB MSI
lL: -7/0 dB Without DID
-X10 451XH X X X X X lL: -6/-1 dB Incoming and
-X20 452XH X X X X X kL: -4/-3 dB Outgoing
-X40 454XH X X X X f -3/-4 dB Loop start
f -4/-3 dB Ground start
-X50 45CXH X X X X d -4.5/-2.5 dB Loop monitoring
-X60 458XH X X X X -7/0 dB and pole
0/-7 dB changing
--------------------------------------------------
- 459XH X X X X -5/-2 dB -----------

X120 45AXH X X X X -7/0 dB f = 4 different

- -5/-2 dB d = 2 different
X130 -6/0 dB (Austr) Impedance
-9/3 dB (Austr) combinations
457XH X X X X -5/-2 dB (ITL)
-6/-1 dB (ITL)
- -5.75/-lL: -8 / +2
45FXH X X X
X310
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
TMLRB 1400 Ohm DUAL-SICOFI 8 1
-Q2186- 561XH X X -6 / -1 dBr Trunk circuit with
X100 DID
BPO loop signal.
Ground signal
recognition
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
a a a a a a a a
b b b b b b b b
Table 8 Trunk connection to the MDF with CDR but without DID

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 195
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Creating a Strapping List, I.M.

9.7 Creating a Strapping List, I.M.

To create a list of all positions that are necessary in the MDF:

1. Use the tables in Section 9.7.1, “System Assignment 16/24 DA Splitting Strip”
and Section 9.7.2, “Network Assignment 25/35 DA Strapping Connector” as
templates to strapping the MDF.

You can also query the assignment of positions with the AMOs SBCSU and
SCSU.

2. Include these lists with the customer documentation. These are the current
working documents for activities performed on the MDF.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
196 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 MDF Pin (a/b) BGR
SLO SLO
T 1 / 3 / 5 / 7 / 9 / 11/ 13/ 15/ 17/ 19/ 21/ 23/ 25/ 27/ 29/ 31/ 33/ 35/ 37/ 39/ 41/ 43/ 45/ 47/ T
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
C
016
C
015
C
014
C
013
C

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
012

HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions

C
011
C
010
C
009
C
008
C
007
C
006
C
005
C
004
C
003
C
002
C
001
9.7.1 System Assignment 16/24 DA Splitting Strip

Da 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 a-b

197
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm

Creating a Strapping List, I.M.

External Cabling Assemblies
9_ExterneKabelbaugruppen.fm
External Cabling Assemblies
Creating a Strapping List, I.M.

9.7.2 Network Assignment 25/35 DA Strapping

Connector
1 / 3 / 5 / 7 / 9 / 11/ 13/ 15/ 17/ 19/ 21/ 23/ 25/ 27/ 29/ 31/ 33/ 35/ 37/ 39/ 41/ 43/ 45/ 47/ 49/ 51/ 53/ 55/ 57/ 59/ 61/ 63/ 65/ 67/ 69/
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70
Pin (a/b)

Slot - D 0016 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
198 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the AC-WIN IP Attendant Console

10 Installing Peripheral Equipment

10.1 Installing the AC-WIN IP Attendant Console

The AC-Win IP V1.0 attendant console is connected over IP to an HG3530 V2.0
in a HiPath 4000 V2.0 / V3.0 / V4 or V5 system. The USB device (handset and
headset) is connected to the PC. Although any standard commercial PC can be
used, Fujitsu-Siemens PCs have been tested and are recommended. The
functionality offered is only provided via software.

IMPORTANT: For detailed information on installation and configuration, refer to

the latest service manual for the AC-Win IP enhanced attendant console.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 199
10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Connecting the Service Terminal

10.2 Connecting the Service Terminal

V.24 interface Ranges for the V.24

in the CSPCI shelf: cable:
S30807-U6625-X 10 m at 19200 bauds
20 m at 9600 bauds
HP4000 30 m at 4800 bauds
f. I.M. and U.S. 90 m at 2400 bauds
D
S
C
Cable:
X A= S30267-Z355-A25 (l=2.5m)
l
zero modem cable 9-pin->9-pin)

Service
connector

BTT

A 230V∼ 230V∼

A
230V∼
Figure 1 Service terminal connection

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
200 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Hicom Teleservice HTS

10.3 Hicom Teleservice HTS

f. I.M. and U.S V.24 interface

D in the CPCI shelf:
S S30122-K7659-X
C
X
l

Modem
connector

A A = Cable, C39195-Z7602-A30/100

TAE6D/
UAE 8/8 a/b MDF
MODEM

230V∼ a/b a/b

SLMA..
a/b
TM..

MODEM a/b Trunk line

Service centre +AWD Exchange
2425M DX

230V∼
Figure 2 Hicom Teleservice HTS

10.4 Connecting Cables

NOTE: The shield of all front cables (except network cables and optical fiber
cables) must be secured to the frame with two cable ties at the shelf opening. See
also Section 4.4, “Shielding Connection on the Opening of the LTU Frame”.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 201
10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Connecting Cables

10.4.1 Connecting ISDN Connections

[Link] PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem and DIUT2

The PNE/PBXXX board connects remote

HiPath systems via the CO network. All HiPath
features can still be used.
HiPath LTUW 2
X2
1 APPCU
DIUS2 adapter 2X15-pin
X3
3 2 6
X2 S2
Port D APPCU
15-pin PNE 2X15-pin
Port C adapter
X3
Port B PBXXX
Port A
# Port M MDF
11 NT/CO network -
15- Port 0
ISDN
pin DIUT2
Port 1
15- 8
pin
CO network - IDN
7
5 10 9 2 wi.
25-pin
Signaling Modem
(max. 4 modems)
220 V∼
1 = S2 DIUS2 digit. interf. unit: S30810-Q2096-X # = Mainte-
2 = APPCU adapter: S30807-K5415-X nance port M,
V.24, 15-pin
3 = PNE private network emulator: S30810-Q6400-X cannon
or: connector
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
5 = Modem e.g. CPV, V.32bis: S30122-X5621-X
6 = S2 cable, 2X15-pin cannon connector: S30267-Z88-A10
7 = V.24 cable, 15/25-pin cannon conn.,10m: C39195-Z7267-C2
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end: S30267-Z167-A..
9 = S-Y(St)Y 16x2x0.4 cable
10 = UAE 8/8 AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: L30460-X 952-X,
AP/UP: L30460-X 958-X
TAE6D: C39334-Z7052-C11
11 = DIUT2 (digit. interf. unit T2): S30810-Q2226-X200

Figure 3 PNE/PBXXX back-to-back with modem and DIUT2

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
202 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Connecting Cables

[Link] PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with DIUT2

The PNE/PBXXX board connects remote HiPath

systems via the CO network. All HiPath features can
still be used.
HiPath
LTUW 2
X2
1 APPCU
DIUS2 adapter 2X15-pin
X3
3 2 6
X2 S2
Port D APPCU
PNE 2X15-pin
Port C adapter
PBXXX X3
Port B
Port A
# Port M MDF
11 NT/CO network -
15-pin Port 0 ISDN
Port 1 DIUT2
8
15-pin

# = Maintenance port M, V.24, 15-pin cannon connector

1 = S2 DIUS2 digit. interf. unit: S30810-Q2096-X
2 = APPCU adapter: S30807-K5415-X
3 = PNE private network emulator: S30810-Q6400-X
or:
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
6 = S2 cable, 22X15-pin cannon connector: S30267-Z88-A10
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end: S30267-Z167-A..
11 = DIUT2 (digit. interf. unit T2): S30810-Q2226-X200
Figure 4 PNE/PBXXX back-to-back without modem and with DIUT2

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 203
10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Connecting Cables

[Link] PNE/PBXXX Back-to-Back with Modem in DIUS2

Emulation with DIUT2

The PNE/PBXXX board connects remote HiPath

HiPath systems via the CO network. All HiPath features can
still be used.
LTUW
3
Port D
15-pin Port C PNE /
Port B PBXXX
Port A MDF
NT/CO network -
# Port M ISDN
Port 0
DIUT2 8
2X15-pin
Port 1

1 CO network -
IDN

5 10 9 2 wi.
7 25-pin
Signaling Modem
(max. 4 modems)
220 V∼
# = Maintenance port M, V.24, 15-pin cannon connector
1 = DIUT2 (digit. interf. unit T2): S30810-Q2226-X200
3 = PNE private network emulator: S30810-Q6400-X
or:
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
5 = Modem e.g. CPV, V.32bis: S30122-X5621-X
7 = V.24 cable, 15/25-pin cannon conn.,10m: C39195-Z7267-C2
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end: S30267-Z167-A..
9 = S-Y(St)Y 16x2x0.4 cable
10 = UAE 8/8 AP: L30460-X 951-X,
UP: L30460-X 952-X,
AP/UP: L30460-X 958-X
TAE6D: C39334-Z7052-C11
Figure 5 PNE/PBXXX back-to-back with modem in DIUS2 emulation with
DIUT2

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
204 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Connecting Cables

[Link] CDG/PBXXX as Gateway, Fully Integrated Mode

LTUW HiPath
MDF
NT/CO network -
3 2 X2 ISDN
APPCU
CDG / adapter 2X15-pin 8 S2
PBXXX X3

2 = APPCU adapter: S30807-K5415-X

3 = CorNet DPNSS Gateway CDG: S30810-Q2218-X
or:
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end: S30267-Z167-A..
Figure 6 CDG/PBXXX as gateway, fully integrated mode

[Link] CDG/PBXXX with DIUT2 as Gateway, Partially

Integrated Mode

HiPath MDF
2 NT/CO network -
LTUW ISDN
X2 S2 8
3 APPCU
CDG
adapter 2X15-pin
PBXXX X3
1
6
Port 0
2X15-pin DIUT2
Port 1 Partially integrated mode is used for <
S2 Hicom E V3.0

1 = DIUT2 (digit. interf. unit T2): S30810-Q2226-X200

2 = APPCU adapter: S30807-K5415-X
3 = CorNet DPNSS Gateway CDG: S30810-Q2218-X
or:
PBXXX peripheral board: S30810-Q6401-X
6 = S2 cable, 2X15-pin cannon connector: S30267-Z88-A10
8 = S2 cable, 15-pin cannon conn., open end: S30267-Z167-A..
Figure 7 CDG/PBXXX with DIUT2 as gateway, partially integrated mode

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 205
10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the Breakout Box

10.5 Installing the Breakout Box

The cable supplied with the breakout box is 1 meter (3 ft.) long. If the breakout
box is installed more that 1 meter (3 ft.) from the HiPath 4000, an additional
standard 25-pair extension cable with Amphenol connectors can be installed
between the breakout box cable and the breakout box.

Because the breakout box cable is unbalanced, any additional length added to
the HiPath 4000 side of the breakout box must be subtracted from the distance
on the peripheral device side of the breakout box. The total distance of the EIA/
TIA-232-E cabling from the peripheral device to the HiPath 4000 must not
exceed a total distance of 15.24 m (50 ft.) without the addition of line drivers.

If the peripheral device is not located near the HiPath 4000, refer to the Siemens
HiPath 4000 Customer Site Planning Guide and AC and DC Systems Power and
Grounding Specifications, G281- 0725-00 for detailed power and grounding infor-
mation.

Install the breakout box (see Figure 8) as follows:

1. Attach the ground wire to the ground lug on the right side of the breakout box.

2. Attach the other end of the ground wire to the system supplemental ground.

IMPORTANT: This step is not necessary for new breakout boxes.

3. For the wall-mounted breakout box, install the wall-mounting bracket on the
wall.

4. Position the breakout box onto the wall-mount bracket or rack as applicable.

5. Install the mounting screws on the left and right ends of the breakout box
faceplate.

6. Attach the cables to the breakout box as follows:

a) Attach the breakout box cable SIVAPAC connector to the appropriate

card slot location at the backplane.

b) Attach the breakout box cable Amphenol connector to the breakout box
J1 connector.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
206 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the Distance Adapter

Wall-mounting bracket

J1

P1
Rack-mountable
P2
faceplate
P3
Grounding lug
P4

40000154ger

Figure 8 Breakout box

Breakout box
Breakout box
adapter
X X
PB T BO
U
-O
AK
RB E

PBX side
40000155ger

Figure 9 Breakout box adapter

10.6 Installing the Distance Adapter

The distance adapter converts the 2-wire U2B1Q interface of the subscriber line
module 2B1Q 3 (SLMQ3) board to the UP0/E interface of the Optiset E or
OptiPoint telephone.

To install the distance adapter:

1. At the back of the distance adapter, connect one end of a line cord to the UP0/
E connector (see Figure 10).

2. Connect the other end of the line cord to the Optiset E or OptiPoint telephone.

3. At the back of the distance adapter, connect another line cord to the PABX
U2B/1Q connector.

4. Connect the other end of the line cord to the MDF.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 207
10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the Distance Adapter

5. Plug the power supply into an ac outlet

6. At the back of the distance adapter, connect the other end of the power supply
into the PS connector.

IMPORTANT: For additional information, refer to the installation instructions that

are shipped with the product.

HiPath4000
4500
2 4
3
U 2B1Q 1
U P0/E
7
SLMQ3
(16 ports) 7 3 4
2
1
U 2B1Q U P0/E
6 5

EIA/TIA-232

40000152ger

1 - Distance adapter
2 - Optiset E (primary)
3 - Analog adapter
4 - Analog device
5 - EIA/TIA-232-E data device
6 - Data adapter
7 - 6000 meters
Figure 10 Connectivity options for the distance adapters

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
208 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the Distance Adapter

Front View

SIEMENS

Multiport (back view)

To Optiset E telephone To SLMQ3

PABX PABX PABX PABX

UP0/E U2B/1Q UP0/E U2B/1Q UP0/E U2B/1Q UP0/E U2B/1Q PS

Power Supply

Single port (back view)

PABX
UP0/E U2B/1Q PS

40000153
Figure 11 Distance adapter

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 209
10_Peripheriegeraete.fm
Installing Peripheral Equipment
Installing the Distance Adapter

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
210 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 11_IPDA.fm
Installing the IPDA

11 Installing the IPDA

This chapter describes the connection of the HiPath 4000 to the (IP Distributed
Architecture) IPDA system. It also provides procedures to install the HiPath IPDA
components.

IMPORTANT: Refer to the HiPath 4000 Service Manual for additional infor-
mation about the IPDA installations (IP solutions).

Figure 1 on page 212 shows a diagram of the HiPath 4000/IPDA connectivity. The
systems can be installed as free-standing systems or can be built into a 19-inch
cabinet.

HiPath 4300 supports up to 40 access points connected over IP (AP 3300 IP or

AP 3700-9 IP) as well as up to 3 shelves that are connected directly (AP3300/
AP3700-9 IP).

HiPath 4000 facilitates the distribution of access points over an IP network. These
access points are shelves (AP3300 IP or AP3700-9 IP) that accommodate
standard HiPath 4000 interface modules. The stations at the access points are
treated in exactly the same way as if they were directly connected to a HiPath
4000 system as before. All IP-distributed components are administered as a
single system over one HiPath 4000 system connection point.

The system consists of a maximum 4 stacks (AP 3300 IP only) and one power
management unit attached to each other in a single row. The system can be
placed anywhere in the room (maximum expansion of 15 LTUW = 5760 ports).
Each stack can be configured with up to 4 boxes. The stacks are permanently
connected. A maximum of 6 wall main distribution frames (MDFHX6) can be
used. This corresponds to expansion up to a maximum 2304 ports.

Cabling should only be configured underfloor (double floor). The reference point
for system cabling is located at the lower end of the stack (see Figure 7).

The system can also be configured using IPDA instead of one single stack
(maximum of four boxes for every stack). These systems can be installed as free-
standing systems or can be built into a 19-inch cabinet.

HiPath 4500 supports up to 83 IP-connected access points (AP 3300 IP or AP

3700/9 IP) in addition to up to 15 directly connected module frames (AP 3300).

HiPath 4000 also facilitates the distribution of access points over an IP network.
These access points are frames (AP 3300 IP or AP 3700/9 IP) that include
standard HiPath 4000 interface modules. User connection to access points is
identical to standard, direct connection to a HiPath 4000 system. Administration
of all IP-distributed components is carried out as a single system using a HiPath
4000 system connection point.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 211
11_IPDA.fm
Installing the IPDA

Peripheral
HG
HG modules
3570 3575
AP 3300 IP
HG

HiPath 4000 LAN Segment

3570
IP network
Peripheral
modules
HG Peripheral
3575 modules

Public Control AP 3700-9IP

network unit
Public
HiPath 4000 network

Figure 1 System architecture overview

NOTE: Each cabinet, including the front cover, forms a shielded unit. Ensure to
lock the cabinets while the system is running and replace the covers immediately
following testing and maintenance.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
212 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 11_IPDA.fm
Installing the IPDA
IPDA Connection Variants

11.1 IPDA Connection Variants

11.1.1 Connecting to AP 3700-9 IP

This section describes possible connections for IPDA system installations:
HiPath 4000 permits you to use both existing AP 3300 cabinets (L80XF) and the
new AP 3700 IP cabinets (AP 3700-9 IP) as IPDA frames (see Figure 2 on page
213).

HiPath 4000
AP 3700-9 IP (9 slots)
HG3575 AP 3700-9 N
*-G5412-X C
AP 3700-9 N U
*-G5412-X C I
U 4
I LUN LUN LUNA
IP 4 A2 A2
2
LUNA LUNA LUNA
network
2 2 2

HiPath 4000
AP3700-9 (9 slots) with HiPath 4000
CSAPE, Survivability AP 3300 IP
Server N
UP C HG3575
U
AP 3700-9 N L80XF I
*-G5412-X C
U 4
I
4 Router
LUNA LUNA LUNA
2 2 2

Figure 2 IPDA connection to AP 3700-9

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 213
11_IPDA.fm
Installing the IPDA
IPDA Connection Variants

11.1.2 Connecting to LTUW/L80XF

HiPath
HiPath 4000 -AP 3700-9 IP
UPR/ HG3570 AP 3700-9 N
UP Stack 1 C
STMI4 U
LTUW/ L
T I
L80XF U 1) 4
C IP LUNA LUNA LUNA
X 2) 2 2 2
network
LTUW/ L 2)
T
L80XF U Router
C
X

LTUW/ L HG3570
T STMI4
L80XF U 1)
C
X 2)
-AP 3300 IP
UCS UP HG3575
L80XF NCUI4
CSPCI 1)
CS-CPCI

Router

2)

Figure 3 Connecting AP 3300 IP and AP 3700-9 to LTUW/L80XF

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
214 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Completing the Installation

12 Starting the System

This chapter describes the commissioning and startup of the HiPath 4000
system.

12.1 Completing the Installation

Once you have completed the installation process, double-check the items in
Table 1.

Step Check Complete

d?
1 Screw connections secure?
2 Grounding system connected correctly (system/MDF)?
See Chapter 6, "Grounding the HiPath 4000".
3 Mains connection protected by fuses?
4 Power supply connected correctly (internal/external)?
Chapter 7, "Connecting to the Mains and Power Supply".
5 Cable connectors secure?
See Section 12.2.2, “Checking the Signal Cable Connections”.
6 Cables laid correctly (with cable grips)?
Refer to Chapter 8, "Internal Line Cables" and Section ,
“External Cabling Assemblies”.
7 MDF layout plan completed?
8 Covers replaced correctly (necessary only if the system is not
started immediately after installation)?
See Section 12.15, “Replacing the Covers”.
9 Documentation assembled and handed over to the customer?

Table 1 Post-installation checklist

12.2 Pre-Power On Checks

Perform the following procedures before you apply power to the system.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 215
12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Pre-Power On Checks

12.2.1 Reseating the Boards

IMPORTANT: Do not use ESD procedures when working with power supplies.
If any power supplies becomes unseated during transport, reseat it by gently
pushing it toward the backplane until it seats in place.

If any board becomes unseated during transport, reseat it as follows:

1. Follow the electrostatic discharge prevention procedures.

2. Insert the peg of the board removal tool into the hole at the top of the
unseated board .

3. Lift the board removal tool and completely unseat the board.

4. Remove the board removal tool.

5. Gently push the board toward the backplane until it seats in the backplane
connector.

12.2.2 Checking the Signal Cable Connections

LTU shelf signal cables are signal cables that originate at the LTU shelf
backplane.

To ensure that all signal cable connections are secure:

1. Check that all signal cables are tightly secured at the connector on each shelf
backplane.

2. Check that the connectors on the other end of the signal cables are tightly
secured.

3. If signal cables were disconnected during transit, refer to the hardware map
to connect and secure these cables to the proper locations.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
216 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Turning on a Nonredundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000

12.2.3 Checking the Power Distribution Cable

Connections
The system is shipped with the power distribution cables already connected to the
backplane. These cables may become disconnected during transit. To check that
the power distribution cable connections in each cabinet:

1. Check for loose or disconnected power distribution cable connections at the

backplanes.

2. If there are any loose or disconnected power distribution cable connections,

refer to the hardware map to connect and secure these cables to the proper
locations.

12.3 Turning on a Nonredundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000

To turn on a nonredundant ac-powered HiPath 4000:

7 WARNING
Observe all applicable safety precautions when working with high voltages.

1. Remove the tie-wrap from the power cord and uncoil.

2. Plug the ac power cord to the wall outlet.

3. Plug the other end of the ac power cord to the LPC80.

4. Turn on the power switch on the LPC80.

5. Turn on the power switch on the PSUP.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 217
12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Turning on Cabinet 1 and 2 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000

12.4 Turning on Cabinet 1 and 2 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000

To turn on cabinet 1 of an ac-powered HiPath 4000:

7 WARNING
Observe all applicable safety precautions when working with high voltages.

1. Plug in the HiPath 4000 power cord to the wall outlet.

2. At the back of the cabinet: Turn on the main circuit breaker under the CSPCI
shelf (see Figure 2 on page 221).

3. At the ACDPX board in UACD stack 1: Turn on the ac input power switches.

4. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 1: Turn on the ac output power
module (PM1, PM2, and PM3) circuit breakers.

5. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 1: Turn on the circuit breakers for
the
–48-V trunks (BULK and TALK).

6. At the back of UACD stack 1: Turn on the backup battery circuit breaker.

IMPORTANT: ECCB is not used in the U.S.

7. Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following order:

a) Shelf 1

b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf power supplies

8. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 1: Turn on the power share circuit
breaker.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
218 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Turning on Cabinet 3 and 4 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000

12.5 Turning on Cabinet 3 and 4 of a Redundant AC-Powered HiPath 4000

To turn on cabinet 3 of an ac-powered HiPath 4000:

7 WARNING
Observe all applicable safety precautions when working with high voltages.

1. Plug in the HiPath 4000 power cord to the wall outlet.

2. At the back of the cabinet: Turn on the main circuit breaker under the CSPCI
shelf (see Figure 2 on page 221).

3. At the ACDPX board in UACD stack 2: Turn on the ac input power switches.

4. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 2: Turn on the ac output power
module (PM1, PM2, and PM3) circuit breakers.

5. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 1: Turn on the –48-V circuit
breakers (BULK and TALK).

6. At the back of UACD stack 2: Turn on the backup battery circuit breaker.

IMPORTANT: ECCB is not used in the U.S.

7. Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following order:

a) Shelf 1

b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf power supplies

8. At the PDPX2 terminal field in UACD stack 2: Turn on the power share circuit
breaker.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 219
12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Turning on Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

12.6 Turning on Cabinet 1 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

To turn on cabinet 1 of a dc-powered HiPath 4000:

1. At the dc system switchboard: Turn on and tag off the circuit breaker for the
dc electric circuit in cabinet 1.

2. At the back of cabinet 1 (under the CSPCI shelf): Turn on the main circuit
breaker (see Figure 2).

3. At the ICBP field in the UDCD cabinet in stack 1: Turn on the PMOD power
switches (see Figure 1).

4. Turn on the cabinet 1 dc-to-dc shelf power supplies in the following order:

a) Shelf 1 (CSPCI shelf, cabinet 1)

b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf modules

5. At the front of UDCD cabinet 1 stack 1 ODP (Figure 3): Turn on the -48-V
TALK circuit breaker.

Figure 1 ICBP

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
220 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Turning on Cabinet 2 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

+48 V
–48 V

Ground
Main to the base unit wire
circuit
breaker
Figure 2 Main circuit breaker, HiPath 4000, rear view

12.7 Turning on Cabinet 2 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

To turn on cabinet 2 of a dc-powered HiPath 4000:

1. At the dc system switchboard: Turn off and tag off the circuit breaker for
cabinet 2.

2. At the back of cabinet 2 (under the CSPCI shelf): Turn on the main circuit
breaker (see Figure 2).

3. At the ICBP field in UDCD cabinet 1 in stack 2: Turn on the PMOD power
switches (see Figure 1).

4. At the front of UDCD cabinet 1 stack 2 ODP: Turn on the -48-V BULK circuit
breaker (see Figure 3).

Figure 3 Output distribution panel, front view

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 221
12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Turning on Cabinet 3 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

In cabinet 2 in the HiPath 4000 system: Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power supplies
in the following order:

a) Shelf 1, (CSPCI shelf, cabinet 2)

b) Remaining dc-to-dc shelf power supplies

5. At the front of UDCD cabinet 1 stack 2 ODP: Turn on the -48-V TALK circuit
breaker (see Figure 3).

12.8 Turning on Cabinet 3 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

To turn on cabinet 3 of a dc-powered HiPath 4000:

1. At the dc system switchboard: Turn off and tag off the circuit breaker for
cabinet 3.

2. At the back of cabinet 3 (under the CSPCI shelf): Turn on the main circuit
breaker.

3. At the ICBP field in UDCD cabinet 2 in stack 1: Turn on the PMOD power
switches.

4. In cabinet 3 in the HiPath 4000 system: Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power
supplies in the following order:

5. Shelf 1 (CSPCI shelf, cabinet 1)

6. Remaining dc-to-dc shelf power supplies

7. At the front of UDCD cabinet 2 stack 1 ODP: Turn on the -48-V TALK circuit
breaker.

12.9 Turning on Cabinet 4 of a DC-Powered HiPath 4000

To turn on cabinet 4 of a dc-powered HiPath 4000:

1. At the dc system switchboard: Turn off and tag off the circuit breaker for
cabinet 4.

2. At the back of cabinet 4 (under the CSPCI shelf): Turn on the main circuit
breaker.

3. At the ICBP field in UDCD cabinet 2 in stack 2: Turn on the PMOD power
switches.

4. At the front of UDCD cabinet 2 stack 2 ODP: Turn on the -48-V BULK circuit
breaker.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
222 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Activating the Clock Battery on the DSCXL Board

5. In cabinet 4 in the HiPath 4000 system: Turn on the dc-to-dc shelf power
supplies in the following order:

6. Shelf 1, (CSPCI shelf, cabinet 1)

7. Remaining dc-to-dc shelf power supplies

8. At the front of UDCD cabinet 2 stack 2 ODP: Turn on the –48-V TALK circuit
breaker (see Figure 3).

12.10 Activating the Clock Battery on the DSCXL Board

The battery backup ensures that the power supply to the system clock is retained
in the event of a power failure, guaranteeing accurate timing for up to 48 hours.

NOTE: Warning: Static Sensitive Devices

Observe all precautions for prevention of electrostatic discharge (ESD). Failure
to follow ESD prevention procedures can result in permanent or intermittent
board failures.

The clock battery is located on the DSCXL boards. The battery is no longer
activated by jumper settings but by the software.

Figure 4 Battery on the DSCXL board

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 223
12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Setting the Date and Time

12.11 Setting the Date and Time

The system time is needed for all central messages and is output to all digital
terminals. Set the current date and time using the AMO DATE.

IMPORTANT: Expect a time delay until the digital terminals have accepted the
change (time/date). The change (time/date) is only implemented on the attendant
console when you remove and then reinsert the handset cord.

If the lithium battery on the DSCXL board is fully charged, the clock continues to
function for up to 48 hours after a power failure.

12.12 Installing the Customer Database

To install the customer HD, use either the:

• Complete customer database from the HD or

• Generate the customer database on-site

The database is generated in two ways:

– Factory-generated hard disk

– Site-generated database

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
224 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Installing the Customer Database

12.12.1 Factory-Generated Database

In this scenario, the factory generates the customer database onto the hard disk
and ships it with the system. The service technician can start up the system
immediately after it is installed.

Figure 5 shows a flowchart of a system startup from the hard disk.

Activate the system clock (connect battery)

Insert the HW dongle

The password is part of
the customer database Switch on power

Check power modules

(LEDs)

Create empty database

with AMO DBC The system is supplied
with a complete Insert MO containing
Create customer customer HD. complete customer DB
database with TAG and copy to HD
Generate system with
TAP (copy ACF to HD or
MO)

Boot the system

Check ports, network access

and server connections.

Customer data backup

1. MO stored ext. by customer
2. MO in drive for backup

Figure 5 Startup flowchart

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 225
12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Installing the Customer Database

12.12.2 Site-Generated Database

In this scenario, the system is only supplied with a test database. The service
technician must create the customer database before the system can be started
up. This can be done on-site or in the Customer Support Center (CSC). Figure 6
shows a flowchart of generating the database on site.

1. Procedure - Checking 2. Procedure - Creating a

As-Unpacked Quality Customer-Specific Database

Test DB Record KONDA (e.g. in HUGT)

(without module
parametri-
zation)
Enter customer data + password
(e.g. with HUGT)

Perform
startup with the Create customer-specific
test database database (ACF)

Delete
test DB ACF transfer

- HOT
- HiPath 4000
Expert Access
HiPath 4000
Customer
System 3. Procedure - ACF Transfer
to the HiPath 4000 System

DB generation

Figure 6 Flowchart of an on-site- or CSC-generation of the database

IMPORTANT: During HW updates, you must maintain the AMO TINFO. This
AMO is used to manage the technical data required for the configuration and
upgrade of a system. The AMO TINFO also has a notepad function which you can
use for making additional entries.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
226 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Starting the System

12.13 Starting the System

When you start the HiPath 4000 system (PABX), use the SSDs or LEDs to identify
the different load states that are reached. These displays can help you check the
PABX start up errors, if any.

IMPORTANT: When importing systems into non-European (EU) countries,

customs regulations stipulates that the system must not be operable when
imported. To do this, connect the SCSI-ADDRESS jumper of the HD to a value
other than 0.
In countries such as AFTA countries, India or the People’s Republic of China, the
MOD must copied to the HD after delivery of the system.

NOTE: If the system is brought into the equipment room from a cold environment,
condensation may occur. Wait until the system temperature is balanced and the
system is completely dry before starting it up.

To perform a startup:

1. Ensure that the plug has been ECOS-tested for safety purposes.

2. Ensure that the LPC80 and PSUPs are off.

3. Plug the LPC80 power plug into the base unit assembly (BUA) that is located
underneath the CSPCI box.

4. Turn on the LPC80 (-48V).

5. Activate all LPC80s first and then activate all PSUPs.

6. If a customer HD is not available, insert the MO disk containing the customer

database in the MO disk drive.
If a complete customer HD is available, replace the test database on the
system with the customer HD database and restart the system.

7. If the system is being started from the MO disk with the test database, initiate
the startup of the HiPath 4000 by pressing the LCT key on the DSCXL board.
If the system is being started from the hard disk drive, the system starts up as
soon as it is turned on.

8. Check the progress of the startup by checking the SSD on the DSCXL board.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 227
12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Starting the System

Operating Status Explanation

ADP is started up

SWU is started up

Table 2 DSCXL, 7-segment display

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
228 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Connecting to the TAP, I.M.

12.14 Connecting to the TAP, I.M.

To connect to the TAP:

IMPORTANT: In I.M., TAP is used to identify the laptop of the service technician.

1. Connect the relevant V.24 cable to the V.24 port of the TAP (in the U.S.,
COM1 or COM2 port).

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the V.24 port of the DSCXL board (see
Figure 7).

3. Connect the power cable of the TAP to an ac outlet.

SSD display

RESET
RUN/ACT
MIN/MAJ
LAN interfaces
LCT/
Custom
Service
IPDA
Atlantic
LAN function LEDs
Service Modem

TAP

HTS

Figure 7 DSCXL board front panel

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 229
12_Systemstart.fm
Starting the System
Replacing the Covers

12.15 Replacing the Covers

Replace the individual covers when the system has been fully mounted, cabled,
and put into operation. The covers are replaced in the reverse order to the order
in which they were removed.

IMPORTANT: Each cabinet, including the front cover, forms a shielded unit.
Ensure to lock the cabinets while the system is running and replace the covers
immediately following testing and maintenance.

1. Replace the covers starting with the lower cabinets.

2. Lock the top cover by turning the quick-release 90 to the left or right (1) until
the covers are firmly secured.

7 CAUTION
Risk of injury from falling unlocked covers
The covers are secure when you hear a click as you shut the cover. The cover
may fall off if it is not locked into place.

3. Install the cover to the cable channel (see Figure 8 on page 230).

Cable channel
covers

Figure 8 Installing the cable channel covers

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
230 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Tools Required

13 Verifying the System

This chapter describes the tests and procedures used to verify the operation of
the system.

13.1 Tools Required

IMPORTANT: Each cabinet, including the front cover, forms a shielded unit.
Ensure to lock the cabinets while the system is running and replace the covers
immediately following testing and maintenance.

Use the following tools to perform the system verification procedures in this
chapter:

• Maintenance telephone with a direct inward dialing (DID) number and direct
trunk select capability enabled

• Telephone test set, P/N 66E3472 or 66E3924

• Transmission measuring test set (TMS) with singing return loss (SRL) and
echo return loss (ERL) capability (SAGE 930A with options 01 and 10C), P/N
66E4280

IMPORTANT: Perform the installation and testing procedures using the Hicom
One Tool (HOT) or "HiPath 4000 Expert Access" (for a more detailed description
of these procedures refer to the Online Help for the Hicom One Tool).

13.2 Checking the Boards

To check the status of the peripheral boards, use the selected software (such as
HiPath 4000 Expert Access, in Europe). Peripheral boards are used in the line
termination unit (such as SLMA2, RG, and LTUCA boards).

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 231
13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Checking the Cables

13.3 Checking the Cables

Check the assignment of the generated subscriber positions to the extensions.
Test the functionality of trunk lines, tie lines, and special equipment.

1. Set up a tie-line (incoming/outgoing) and then initiate a consultation call.

Forward the call.

2. Set up a trunk (incoming/outgoing) and then initiate a consultation call.

3. Forward the call.

4. Check the line statuses using the TAP (analog circuits, digital circuits and
special circuits):

5. Ensure that the connected lines are in the READY state.

13.4 Checking and Testing the Features

To check the available features using the TAP and ensure that they are
functioning correctly, refer to the operating instructions for the terminals and
attendant console. Test all features for functionality.

A list of abbreviations can be found in the HiPath 4000 service manual under the
AMO description FEASU.

13.5 Testing the Restart and Failure Transfer Function

Test the restart behavior and the failure transfer function of the system using the
TAP.

1. Test soft restart

2. Test hard restart.

To test the failure transfer function of the system (only with an analog trunk):

1. Switch off the main power supply to the system.

2. Test the failure transfer function on the relevant customer device.

– Is there a dial tone from the exchange?

– Is it possible to dial the exchange?

In the event of a power failure on the system, an analog trunk is switched on
an analog device by means of a drop out relay.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
232 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Backing up the Customer Data

3. After the test is complete, switch on the power to the system again (reload)
and wait until it has started up.

13.6 Backing up the Customer Data

In order to be able to create a customer-specific hard disk as quickly as possible
in the event of a hard disk failure, you must back up the PS program system for
every customer.

IMPORTANT: In HiPath 4000 systems without an MO drive, the program system

(ACF) is backed up in the Flash Memory (“:M:” drive).

13.7 Setting and Activating the HTS Function

With PABX Teleservice, service activities (for example, system maintenance,
troubleshooting, and universal services) can be performed by means of the
telephone network. This facility allows the product specialist to provide support
remotely.

PABX Teleservice offers the following features:

• Remote maintenance

• Automatic fault reporting

• Software patches

The system has a standard HTS function. If the customer needs to use a HTS
function:

1. Make the necessary hardware and software settings on the system (refer to
the Service Manual description "Hicom Teleservice HTS").

2. Connect the modem for HTS to the V.24 port of the DSCXL module.

3. Set up the extension for HTS (extract from database).

4. Once you have made the required settings, activate and check the
Teleservice function using the TAP.

5. Inform your control center about the new customer and initiate dial-up from
the HTS console.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 233
13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Checking the Ring Generator

13.8 Checking the Ring Generator

To verify the ring generator, connect an ANATE to an SLMA port and dial the
ANATE. If the ANATE rings like the normal U.S. cadence, it is functioning
properly.

IMPORTANT: If the ANATE telephone does not ring, check the ring generator
settings.

7 WARNING
Be extremely careful when working with the ring generator. High voltages
are present at the ring generator.

Ensure that the ring generator is jumpered as follows before powering on the
system: 85 V, 20 Hz. To check this setting:

1. Ensure that the system is off.

2. Unscrew the screw that holds the ring generator in place.

3. Remove the ring generator.

4. On the backside of the ring generator, find a black plastic flap.

5. Check the setting.

6. Refer to the diagram on the ring generator for additional information.

13.9 Verifying the Station-to-MDF Connections

If the MDF cabling is performed by a subcontractor, verify and document all work
as follows:

1. Check on the progress of the subcontractor’s work.

2. Issue or implement change orders to the subcontractor as needed.

3. Walk through the site to verify that the cabling has been completed according
to guidelines, and either accept the work or write a list of the corrections to be
made.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
234 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

13.10 Verifying Transmission Facilities

This section describes the procedures used to verify CO and DID trunks, ISDN
and T1 spans, and OPS lines and trunks.

13.10.1 Balancing Networks

To ensure optimum transmission performance, the TMC16, TMDID, and SLMA3
channels must be configured to the balance network that provides the best return
loss (ERL and SRL). The balance network is configured by means of COFIDX
field in the Direct AMO Dialog fast-path code (command) CHATCSU for TMDID,
TMC16, and the NWBALNO field in command CHASCSU for OPS. A default
value of 3 provides adequate performance for most trunk facilities, and OPS lines
usually perform adequately with a default value of 2.

13.10.2 Choosing the Balance Network

For locally used trunks, the best balance network choice provides the highest
ERL value that is equal to or greater than 10 dB, and an SRL low and SRL high
that are equal to or greater than 10 dB. connotations

For facilities that are utilized within complex networks the best balance choice
provides the highest ERL value that is equal to or greater than 18 dB and an SRL
low and high that are equal to or greater than 10 dB.

IMPORTANT: Do not select a balance network if the measured ERL value is less
than either of the measured SRL values.

Table 1 shows various sample return loss measurements. In this example the
best choice balance network would be network 3. Network 2 and 5 are acceptable
for local trunks. Network 4 is not acceptable.

Network ERL (dB) SRL Low (db) SRL High (db)

2 13.7 10.2 11.0
3 18.6 13.2 14.5
4 6.2 5.7 6.1
5 15.7 14.1 14.3

Table 1 Return loss measurement examples (1)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 235
13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

13.10.3 Selecting the Balance Network

NOTE: Use this method only when more than one balance network meets the
minimum criteria set previously in Section 13.10.2, “Choosing the Balance
Network”. Do not include balance networks if the measurements fall below any of
the minimum level requirements.

If a trunk only meets or exceeds the minimum requirements on one balance

network, then select that balance network but do not use this method.

To select a balance network:

1. Select a trunk.

2. Take the ERL and SRL measurements for all four networks on the selected
trunk.

IMPORTANT: Compare the four network measurements in each category.

3. Assign a quality factor rank (Q number 1 to 4) number, with 4 being the best
return loss measurement. Ignore the trunk if any measurement falls below
minimum requirements.

4. List the Q number for each balance network. Select the higher Q number
total.

In the event that two trunks have the same Q number total, select the network
with the highest ERL measurement. If both trunks have the same ERL
measurement, select the network with the highest SRL low measurement
followed by the highest SRL high measurement.

Network 3 (Table 2) shows an example of the best trunk balance network

using the Q number method.

Net- ERL (dB) Q-No. SRL Low Q-No. SRL Q-No. Q-No.
work ERL (db) SRL Low High SRL Total
(db) High
2 13.7 2 10.2 2 11.0 2 6
3 18.6 4 13.2 3 12.5 4 11
4 6.2 5.7 6.1
5 15.7 3 14.1 4 14.3 3 10

Table 2 Return loss measurement examples (2)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
236 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

[Link] Balancing CO Trunks

To determine the best central office (CO) trunk configuration, perform the
following:

1. Set the balance network in the trunk configuration to 2 as follows:

a) Type the command CHA-TCSU and press Enter.

b) Enter the following values and press Enter after each:

Field Value
PEN1 <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
DEV <GRDSTR or LPSTR>
COFIDX 2

IMPORTANT: The angle brackets (< >) indicate fields that require trunk
specific information.

2. Activate the CO line to load the new balance network as follows:

a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.

b) Enter the following values and press Enter after each:

Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE PEN
PEN1 <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
PEN2 <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
3. Disconnect the maintenance telephone from the MDF block.

4. Connect the transmission test set to the maintenance telephone port (Figure
1).

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 237
13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

-2.5 dBm

HiPath 4000

SLMA3 T
or ATI
R

TMC16 T
R

40000126ger
1 - Bridge clips
2 - MDF
3 - Demarc
4 - TMS
5 - Central office
6 - Maintenance telephone
Figure 1 Test setup for measuring ERL and SRL on CO trunk channels

5. Verify that the TMS is in termination mode with 600-Ohm impedance.

6. Direct select the trunk under test by dialing # # 8 x x x.

7. Listen for CO dial tone. If you cannot get dial tone, ensure that it is not in use,
and then perform the CO trunk signaling tests.

8. Dial the silent termination number of the facility provider.

9. Measure and note the ERL and SRL (low and high) values.

10. Repeat steps 1 through 9 of this procedure for balance network configura-
tions 3, 4, and 5.

IMPORTANT: In step 1, change COFIDX=2 in the command line to the

correct balance network configuration number.

11. Configure the balance network in the trunk configuration that provided the
best ERL and SRL values.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
238 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

[Link] Balancing DID Trunks

To determine the best DID trunk configuration:

1. Set the balance network in the trunk configuration to 2 as follows:

a) Type the command CHA-TCSU and press Enter.

b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
PEN <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
DEV DID
COFIDX 2
2. Activate the DID line to load the new balance network as follows:

a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.

b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE PEN
PEN1 <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>
PEN2 <LTG-LTU-SLOT-CIRCUIT>

IMPORTANT: Steps 3 through 7 are not applicable to systems with hardware

and symptom diagnosis (HSD).

3. Disconnect the maintenance telephone from the MDF block.

4. Connect the TMS to the maintenance telephone port (Figure 2).

-2.5 dBm

HiPath 4000

T
Analog
board R

TMDID T
board R

40000127ger
1 - Bridge clips
2 - MDF
3 - Demarc
4 - TMS
5 - Central office
6 - Maintenance telephone
Figure 2 Test setup for measuring ERL and SRL on DID trunk channels

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 239
13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

5. Ensure that the TMS is in terminated mode with 600-Ohm impedance.

6. Have the facility provider seize the DID trunk under test and then terminate it
with silent termination.

7. Using the TMS, measure and note the value of the ERL and the SRL.

8. Repeat steps 1 though 7 for balance network configurations with the COFIDX
set to 3, 4, and 5.

9. Configure the balance network in the trunk configuration that provided the
best ERL and SRL values.

[Link] Balancing OPS Lines and Trunks

To determine the best OPS line configuration, perform the following:

1. Set the balance network in the trunk configuration to 1 as follows:

a) Type the command CHA-SCSU and press Enter.

b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
STNO <OPS extension #>
DEVFUNC ANATE
COFIDX 5
2. Activate the OPS line to load the new balance network as follows:

a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.

b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE STNO
STNO <OPS extension #>
3. Disconnect the maintenance telephone from the MDF block.

4. Connect the TMS to the maintenance telephone port (Figure 3).

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
240 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

HiPath 4000

Analog T T
board R R
-2.5 dBm

Analog T
board R

40000128ger
1 - Demarc
2 - Bridge clips
3 - Transmission facilities
4 - MDF
5 - TMS
6 - Maintenance telephone
7 - Distant-end OPS telephone
Figure 3 Test setup for measuring ERL and SRL on OPS lines

5. Verify that the TMS is in termination mode with 600-Ohm impedance.

6. Call the OPS telephone.

7. Have the distant-end take the OPS telephone off-hook.

8. Measure and note the ERL and SRL (low and high) values.

9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for OPS line configurations for balance network
configurations 2, 3, and 4.

10. Configure the balance network in the line configuration that provided the best
ERL and SRL values.

13.10.4 Verifying ISDN Spans

Verify the functionality of the D channel of the ISDN span as follows:

1. Ensure that the local continuity and the end-to-end link tests have been
performed.

2. Ensure that personnel on the far end of the ISDN span have been assigned
to perform this verification procedure with you.

3. Activate the DIU2U board as follows:

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 241
13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

a) Type the command ACT-BSSU and press Enter.

b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
LTG <LTG>
LTU <LTU>
SLOT <SLOT>
4. Activate the D channel of the ISDN span as follows:

a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.

b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
PEN <PEN of the D channel>
5. Activate all the bearer channels of the ISDN span as follows:

a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.

b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
PEN <PEN1><PEN2>
The D channel becomes operational within 15 seconds.
If the D channel is not operational within 15 seconds after activation, check
the configuration for the different types of applications in Table 3 through
Table 6.

IMPORTANT: Record the device type and bipolar eight substitution infor-
mation.

BCSU Parameters If the near end is The far end should be

Timing type (TIMTYP) SYST LOOP
Frame (FRAME) STD STD
Bipolar eight substitution YES YES
(BI8SUB)
Bipolar violation detection YES YES
Network or user emulation NETWK USER NETWK
(NETUSR)

Table 3 BCSU configuration checks for CorNet trunks

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
242 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

TCSU Parameters If the near end is The far end should be

Device type (DEV) S1D S1D
S1B S1B

Table 4 TCSU configuration checks for CorNet trunks

BCSU Parameters Near End

Timing type (TIMTYP) LOOP
Frame (FRAME) <STD or ESF> (Must be the same as the far-end configu-
ration.)
If the frame = ESF, check the bipolar eight substitution
(BI8SUB) value.
BI8SUB <NO or YES> (Must be the same as the far-end configu-
ration.)
Bipolar violation detection <NO or YES> (Must be the same as the far-end configu-
ration.)
Network or user emulation USER
(NETUSR)

Table 5 BCSU configuration checks for AT&T, MCI, and SPRINT ISDN
trunks

TCSU Parameters Far End

Protocol (PROTOCOL) <ATT49, ATT59 or MCI for SPRINT and MCI2 for MCI>
(Must be the same as the far-end configuration).

Table 6 TCSU configuration checks for AT&T, MCI, and SPRINT ISDN trunks

IMPORTANT: If all of the configurations are correct and the D channel is still not
operational, contact your next level of support.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 243
13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying Transmission Facilities

13.10.5 Verifying T1 Spans

To verify T1 spans:

1. Activate the DIU2U board as follows:

a) Type the command ACT-BSSU and press Enter.

b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE PEN
PEN1 <PEN1>
PEN2 <PEN2>
2. Activate all the channels of the span as follows:

a) Type the command ACT-DSSU and press Enter.

b) Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
ONTYPE AUL
TYPE <PEN>
PEN1 <PEN1>
PEN <PEN2>
3. Ensure that the local continuity and the end-to-end link tests have been
performed.

4. Perform a bit error rate test (BERT). Should the BERT fail, contact your local
provider.

5. Display the current link error count of the T1 span as follows:

Type the command DIS-BSSU and press Enter. Repeat this action several
times.
Field Value
LTG 1
LTU <LTU>
SLOT <SLOT>
CCTNO <blank>
DIS-TYPE <blank>
RESET <blank>
After 15 seconds, the T1 span enters the green alarm state and the following
errors stop increasing:

• Bipolar error seconds (BES)

• Out-of-frame error seconds (OES)

• Up slips (US)

• Down slips (DS)

• Error seconds (ES)

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
244 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying the MO-Disk Drive

• Frame slips (FS)

If the T1 span enters the green alarm state but the errors are increasing,
perform a BERT.

13.10.6 Recording Circuit IDs

Record circuit IDs in the Jack and Pin Record Data Sheet of the Siemens 9751
CBX and 9200 CBX System Site Log.

13.11 Verifying the MO-Disk Drive

Verify the operation of the MO-disk drive by checking its status as follows:

1. Type DIS-DSSM and press Enter.

2. Type the following values, then press Enter.

Field Value
UNIT A1
TYPE C
CNO 6

13.12 Verifying the Hard Disk

Verify the hard disk as follows:

1. Check the status of the hard disk drive as follows:

a) Type DIS-DSKST and press Enter.

b) Enter the following values and press Enter after each:

Field Value
UNIT <A1, V1, T1>
TYPE C
CNO <1 - 8>
The screen displays IN SERVICE.

2. If the drive is not ready, repeat steps 1a and 1b, and proceed to the following
steps:

a) Enter the command ACT-DSKX and press Enter.

b) Enter the following values and press Enter after each:

Field Value
UNIT <A1, V1, T1>
CNO <1 - 8>

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 245
13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers

3. If the hard disk does not activate, perform steps 5 through 10 in Section 13.11,
“Verifying the MO-Disk Drive”.

13.13 Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers

This section provides test procedures to verify the operation of the HiPath 4000
system features and servers.

13.13.1 Testing CDR

Test the call detail recording (CDR) list output of the system as follows:

1. Print the following information by typing the commands shown in Table 7, one
at a time.

Command Information to Retrieve

DIS-MSEL Operating condition, basic device (BASDEB), STNTBL1,
and DNOTBL1
DIS-MLIST Station number
DIS-MFREQ DIALOGFIELD

Table 7 CDR reports to retrieve

2. From the DIS-MSEL printout, select a selection group that has OPERATION
CONDITION = ON.

3. If STNTBL1=N, and DNOTBL1=N, then all stations are valid for CDR. If
STNTBL1=Y, and DNOTBL1=Y, find valid stations for CDR from the
command DIS-MLIST printout.

4. If BASDEV=DEV#, then the CDR must be sent to a printer or a terminal

(depending on the configured device on port 1 of the ADP).

5. Make an external call from any valid station. The CDR must be sent either to
a printer or to a terminal when the call is completed.

6. If BASDEV=CDRC1 or (CDRC2), then the CDR must be sent to a file. From

the FCP DISMFREQ printout, if at least one dialog field number exists,
establish an external call from any valid station.

7. Type the command DIS-MFREQ and then press Enter.

8. Type the field value DIAFNO=<dialog field #>, and then press Enter.

9. The CDR must be sent to a file.

10. If the dialog fields are free in the DIS-MFREQ command printout: type the
command ADD-MFREQ and press Enter.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
246 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers

11. Type the following field values and confirm every input with Enter:
Field Value
TYPE L
DIAFNO 1
FILE CDRC1
FILESTA <YYMMDDHHmm>
FILEND <YYMMDDHHmm>
FORMFORM0 2
BLKSIZE 127
FOUT Y
STAT YYMMDDHHmm>
MULTOUT N
PERIOD 0
SELSTOP Y
12. Make an external call from any valid station.

13. Type the command OUT-MFREQ and press Enter.

14. Type the field value DIAFNO=<l> and then press Enter.

15. When the CDR test is finished, type the command DEL-MFREQ and press
Enter.

16. Type the field value DIAFNO=<l> and then press Enter.

13.13.2 Testing Least-Cost Routing

Test the least-cost routing (LCR) configuration of the system after all of the
outgoing trunks have been cut over and tested as follows:

1. Print the reports in Table 8.

Command Parameters Information to Retrieve

to Set
DIS-LROUT Trunk group numbers and route numbers
DIS-LDPLN Dialing patterns and route numbers
DIS-LSCHD LCR schedule
DIS-LAORT Area code and office code restrictions
DIS-LCOS LCR classes of service
DIS-DPLN TYPE=STN ROLMnet dialing patterns and route numbers
DIS-TGACC PEN locations of trunk circuits

Table 8 LCR reports to retrieve

2. Select a dialing pattern from the Dialing Patterns and Route Numbers report.

3. Note the route number that is associated with the selected dialing pattern.

4. Note the first trunk group (route element) associated with the route number in
the Trunk Group Numbers and Route Numbers report.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 247
13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying the Operation of System Features and Servers

5. Ensure that the trunk group is available to test as follows:

a) Check the LCR schedule report to ensure that the LCR schedule
presently allows access to the selected route element. (Look at the Trunk
Group Numbers and Route Numbers report and note the letters under the
SCHEDULES field that have been marked with an X. Use these letters as
an input to the LCR schedule report.)

If the schedule blocks a call to that trunk group, change the system date
and time to comply with the schedule, by typing the command CHADATE.

b) Check for a READY status of the actual trunk circuits in that group by
typing the command DIS-SDSU-TK with the PENs found in the PEN
locations of the trunk circuits report.

c) Check the AUTH field of the Trunk Group Numbers and Route Numbers
report to ensure that the LCOS for the maintenance extension is high
enough to use that route by typing the command DIS-SCSU to find the
LCOSV of the maintenance extension.

d) Check the AORT field of the Trunk Group Numbers and Route Numbers
report to ensure that the test number does not contain an area code or
office code that is blocked for that route. Use the AORT index number
from the Trunk Group Numbers and Route Numbers report in the DIS-
LAORT report to check this.

6. Dial a far-end test number that incorporates the selected dialing pattern.
Ensure that the call is complete.

7. Ensure that one of the trunks in the trunk group was seized by call processing,
by typing the command DIS-SDSU with the PENs found in the PEN Locations
of Trunk Circuits report. The initials CP should appear in the status field.

8. Deactivate the trunk group by typing the command DEADSSU with the PENs
found in the PEN Locations of Trunk Circuits report.

9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 with the remaining route elements (trunk group) in
the route.

10. Repeat steps 3 through 9 with the remaining dialing patterns in the Dialing
Patterns and Route Numbers report.

11. Repeat steps 2 through 9 with a ROLMnet extension from each route found
in the ROLMnet Dialing Patterns and Route Numbers report.

12. If the date and time were changed in step 5a, reset them to their correct
values.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
248 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Verifying the System Bypass

13.14 Verifying the System Bypass

Verify the system bypass as follows:

1. Check the punch down sequence of the DSCXL board.

2. Refer to the HiPath 4000 Service Manual for the SSD information on the
DSCXL board to check whether the system bypass is functioning properly.

13.15 Customer Training, I.M.

Once the system is fully operational, the following basic training is to be provided
for each system.

• Basic introduction to the HiPath 4000 system for a person nominated by the
customer.

• Explanation of the functionality and performance of the attendant console

(operation of the attendant console)

• Functionality of the Chese (Executive/Secretary service) in hard-coded and

freely-programmable keys.

• Introduction to the digital console including the team function, which is

available in hard-coded and freely-programmable keys.

The customer is responsible for nominating the participants in the basic training.
The number of participants is limited to 2-4 persons.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 249
13_Systemueberpruefung.fm
Verifying the System
Customer Training, I.M.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
250 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 14_Systemerweiterung.fm
Adding Cabinets to the System
Expansion Configuration

14 Adding Cabinets to the System

This section describes procedures to add cabinets to the HiPath 4000.

14.1 Expansion Configuration

MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6 MDFHX6

(UP/ (UP/ (UP/ (UP/ (UP/ (UP/

UPR..1) UPR..2) UPR..3) UPR..4) UPR..5) UPR..6)

UP/UPR.. 3 UP/UPR.. 7 UP/UPR.. 11 UP/UPR.. 15

UP/UPR.. 2 UP/UPR.. 6 UP/UPR.. 10 UP/UPR.. 14

UACD 2 UP/UPR.. 1 UP/UPR.. 5 UP/UPR.. 9 UP/UPR.. 13

UACD 1 CSPCI UP/UPR.. 4 UP/UPR.. 8 UP/UPR.. 12

Power box Stack 1 Stack 2 Stack 3 Stack 4

Figure 1 Expanded HiPath 4000 configuration with maximum MDFHX6

number

The expansion cabinets in a multiple-cabinet system (maximum four cabinets)

are on top of the basic (CC80F) cabinet. The expansion cabinets are secured
together using quick-release locks on the front.

To expand the system:

NOTE: The connecting screws between the individual cabinets are not used for
internal grounding purposes.

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 251
14_Systemerweiterung.fm
Adding Cabinets to the System
Connecting the Cabinet Stacks

1. Release the cabinet by turning the quick-release locks 90 to the left or right
(see Figure 2).

2. Lift the housing cover off the base cabinet.

IMPORTANT: The housing cover and backplane are also secured in the
same manner as the expansion cabinets. This allows components to be
removed individually after the quick-release locks have been released.

3. Mount the expansion cabinet on top of the existing expansion cabinet.

4. Secure with screws.

5. Refer to the hardware to connect the telephony cables.

Figure 2 Removing system components

14.2 Connecting the Cabinet Stacks

To connect the cabinet stacks, refer to Section 6.2.2, “Installing the Ground Straps
Between Cabinets”

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, <Document Release Date>

252 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 [Link]
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Index

Index Z

Overview 36
Connecting the power box to the system 162
Numerics Connecting to the mains and power supply 109
24-port boards Conventions 10
removing 63 Covers
60-volt power supply APPS 119 removing 52
CSPCI box configuration
A
duplex configuration 30
AC-to-DC connection (redundant) 130
AC-to-DC connection of the LTUW box 130 D
AC-to-DC power box installation 75 Data protection and data security 25
Adapter 2 66 DC connection (redundant) 132
Administrative data processor 39 DC connection with external power supplies 125
ADP DC connections
system startup 39 AP 3700 cabinets 136
ADS DC-to-DC power box installation 76
applications DID trunks, balancing 239
BELAU 41 Distance adapter
system security 41 installing 207
AP3300 multiple cabinet Documentation feedback 26
installation 74 Drill template MDF MDFHX 6 97
AP3300 single-cabinet installation 73 Drill template MDF MDFHX 8 98
AP3700 cabinets DSCXL displays 228
installation variants 89
E
B Emergencies 19
Balance network External servers 38
overview 235
selecting 235 G
Balancing CO trunks 237 Ground straps between individual cabinets 100, 101
Balancing DID trunks 239 Ground straps for cabinet base 100
Balancing OPS lines and trunks 240 Grounding
Battery cable cross-sections 165 AP 3700 cabinets 105
Battery, connecting to the power box 133 base cabinet, U.S. 103
cabinet frame 102
C HiPath 4000 system 99
Cable channels LTU cabinets (internal) 104
installing 61 main distribution frame 99
Cable routing Grounding overview 1 106
AP 3700-13 to MDF (MDFHX6) 176 Grounding overview 2 107
AP 3700-13 to MDF (MDFHX8) 179
LTU-MDF (MDFHX6) 175 H
LTU-MDF (MDFHX8) 178 Hard disk, checking 245
Cabling assemblies, external 173 Hardware and symptom diagnosis 41
CDR HiPath 4000 cabinets
applications 41 stacking 60
CO trunks, balancing 237 HiPath 4000, AC-powered, nonredundant 28
Common control units

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 253
[Link]
Index Nur für den internen Gebrauch

I P
Important information 18 Positioning the HiPath 4000 cabinet 49
Important labels on the system 56 Power supplies 119
Installation materials 46 Proper disposal and recycling 21
Installation notes 63 PSDXE connection 164
Installation procedures 43 PSIO breakout box, installing 206
Installation variants 73
Installation with AP 3300 cabinets 73 R
Installing seismic anchors 59 Realtime Diagnostics System 41
Interface Receiving the system 47
maintenance terminal 41 Reference manuals 9
Internal servers 42 Remove the system from its packaging. 48
Inventory Reporting accidents 19
hardware 58 Roller base
installation kit 58 leveling 50
software 58
S
ISDN spans
Safety information and warnings 11
verifying 241
Seismic anchors, installing 59
L Server types and applications overview 38
LAN, WAN, and DMZ connections (screened) 23 Service units 37
Line cables, internal 167 Shelf configuration 81
LPC80 operation mode 124 AP3700-13 86
LPC80 setting options 123 AP3700-9 83
CSPCI box 81
M LTUW box 31
Mains connection power box stack 89
AP 3700 cabinets 136 UP cabinet 83
overview of mains connection 1 116 UPR cabinet 82
overview of mains connection 2 118 Shielding connection on the LTU frame 72
power box 113 Shipping damage 48
single-phase network 115 Signal cables, installing 167
three-phase network 114 SIPAC-SIVAPAC adapter 66
variants 110 Site verification 47
with mid-point grounding 117 SIVAPAC-to-SIPAC adapter 64
MCM Standalone cabinet
ALUM cable types 182 leveling 51
MDF cable assignment 181 Standard installation tools required for installation 46
MDF power supply 134 Standards and guidelines 22
MDFHX6, assembly 174 Strapping lists 196
MDFHX8, assembly 177 Switching networks 36
MO disk, verifying 245 Switching unit
overview 36
N System
Notations used in the manual 10 leveling 50
System bypass
O
verifying 249
OPS lines and trunks, balancing 240
System configuration 27
Overview of subscriber line modules/trunk board
connections 183 T
Overvoltage protection for boards 180 Telephony shelves 38
Testing

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
254 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions
 [Link]
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Index

CDR 246
LCR 247
Tools and equipment required for pre-installation tasks
47
Trunk boards, connecting 190
Trunk bypass, installing 171
Trunk lines
pre-installation procedures 58

U
UACD power box 153
Unloading
system with roller base 49
UP/L80XF DC connection 130
Using this manual 9

V
Verifying
ISDN spans 241
system bypass 249
Verifying the hard disk 245
Verifying the system
tools required 231

W
Warning sign
Caution 16
Danger 13
Warning 14

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions 255
[Link]
Index Nur für den internen Gebrauch

A31003-H3150-J100-1-7631, 03/2009
256 HiPath 4000 V5, Installation Instructions